Sharp 37FT-15H Operating instructions

TM
9-2320-209-10-1
TO 36A12-1B-1091-1
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATION,
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE
AND
DATA
OPERATOR LEVEL
21/2-TON, 6X6, M44A1 AND M44A2 SERIES TRUCKS
(MULTIFUEL)
TRUCK, CARGO: M35A1 ,
M35A2, M35A2C, M36A2; TRUCK,
Chapter 3
Service Upon
Receipt of
Equipment
Chapter 4
Operating
Procedures
TANK, FUEL: M49A1C, M49A2C; TRUCK, TANK,
WATER: M50A1, M50A2, M50A3; TRUCK, VAN,
Appendix A
References
SHOP: M109A2, M109A3; TRUCK, REPAIR SHOP:
M185A2, M185A3; TRUCK, TRACTOR: M275AI,
M275A2; TRUCK, DUMP: M342A2; TRUCK,
Appendix B
Components
of End Item
List
MAINTENANCE, PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION:
M756A2; TRUCK, MAINTENANCE,
EARTH BORING AND POLESETTING: M764
Appendix C
Additional
Authorization
List
Appendix D
Expendable
Supplies and
Materials
List
D E P A R T M E N T S O F T H E A R M Y A N T H E A I R F O, R C E
SEPTEMBER 1980
WARNING
EXHAUST GASES CAN BE DEADLY
Exposure to exhaust gases produces symptoms of headache, dizziness, loss of muscular control, apparent drowsiness, and coma. Permanent brain damage or death can
result from severe exposure.
Carbon monoxide occurs in the exhaust fumes of fuel burning heaters and internal
combustion engines, and becomes dangerously concentrated under conditions of inadequate ventilation. The following precautions must be observed to insure the safety
of personnel whenever fuel burning heater(s) or engine of any vehicle is operated for
maintenance purposes or tactical use.
Do not operate heater or engine of vehicle in an enclosed area unless it is adequately
ventilated.
Do not idle engine for long periods without maintaining adequate ventilation in personnel compartments.
Do not drive any vehicle with inspection plates or cover plates removed unless necessary for maintenance purposes.
Be alert at all times during vehicle operation for exhaust odors and exposure symptoms.
If either are present, immediately ventilate personnel compartments. If symptoms persist, remove affected personnel from vehicle and treat as follows: expose to fresh air;
keep warm; do not permit physical exercise; if necessary, administer artificial
respiration.
If exposed, seek prompt medical attention for possible delayed onset of acute lung
congestion. Administer oxygen if available.
The best defense against exhaust gas poisoning is adequate ventilation.
Use extreme care when removing radiator cap, especially when temperature gage
shows above 180°F.
Always wear leather gloves when handling winch cable. Never allow cable to slip
through hands. Do not operate winch with less than four turns of cable on drum.
Do not drive truck until the low air pressure warning buzzer is silent and the air
pressure gage shows at least 65 PSI. This is the minimum pressure required for safe
braking action.
Do not use hand throttle to drive the vehicle.
Do not park truck with front transmission gearshift lever in gear.
If your vehicle class number is greater than the bridge class number, do not cross.
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within the limits specified in this TM.
Operation beyond these limits is prohibited IAW AR 70-1 without written approval from the Commander,
U.S. Army Tank-Automotive Command, ATTN: AMSTA-CM-S, Warren, MI 48397-5000.
Change 2
PIN: 046723-002
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
TECHNICAL MANUAL
NO. TM 9-2320-209-10-1
C2
TECHNICAL ORDER
NO. 36A12-1B-1091-1
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington D. C., 30 November 1989
CHANGE
No. 2
OPERATION, INSTALLATION AND
REFERENCE DATA
OPERATOR LEVEL
2-1/2 TON, 6X6, M44A1 AND M44A2 SERIES TRUCKS
(MULTIFUEL)
TRUCK, CARGO: M35A1,
M35A2, M35A2C, M36A2; TRUCK,
TANK, FUEL: M49A1C, M49A2C; TRUCK, TANK,
WATER M50A1, M50A2, M50A3; TRUCK, VAN,
SHOP: M109A2, M109A3; TRUCK, REPAIR SHOP:
M185A2, M185A3; TRUCK, TRACTOR: M275A1,
M275A2; TRUCK, DUMP: M342A2; TRUCK,
MAINTENANCE, PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION:
M756A2; TRUCK, MAINTENANCE,
EARTH BORING AND POLESETTING: M764
TM 9-2320-209-10-1/TO 36A12-1B-1091-1, dated 26 September 1980, is changed as follows:
1. Change to narrative material is indicated by a vertical bar in the outside margin of the page. Added or
revised illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the identification number.
2. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below..
3. File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes.
Remove Pages
Insert Pages
2-1 and 2-2
4-29 and 4-30
Cover and Warning
2-1 and 2-2
4-29 and 4-30
Cover and Warning
By Order of the Secretary of the Army
CARL E. VUONO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
WILLIAM J. MEEHAN II
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-38-R (Block 201) Operator maintenance requirements
for Truck, Gasoline, 2 l/4-ton, 6x6, M44-series.
*TM 9-2320 -209-10-1
TO 36A12-1B-1091-1
TECHNICAL MANUAL
NO. 9-2320 -209-10-1
DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY
AND
THE AIR FORCE
TECHNICAL ORDER
NO. 36A12-1B-1091-1
Washington, DC, 26 September 1980
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATION, INSTALLATION AND REFERENCE DATA
OPERATOR LEVEL
21/2-TON, 6X6, M44A1 AND M44A2 SERIES TRUCKS
(MULTIFUEL)
Model
NSN without Winch
NSN with Winch
Truck, Cargo
M35A1
M35A2
M35A2C
M36A2
2320-00-542-5633
2320-00-077-1616
2320-00-926-0873
2320-00-077-1618
2320-00-542-5634
2320-00-077-1617
2320-00-926-0875
2320-00-077-1619
Truck, Tank, Fuel
M49A1C
M49A2C
2320-00-440-3349
2320-00-077-1631
2320-00-440-3346
2320-00-077-1632
Truck, Tank, Water
M50A1
M50A2
M50A3
2320-00-440-8307
2320-00-077-1633
2320-00-937-4036
2320-00-440-8305
2320-00-077-1634
2320-00-937-5264
Truck, Van, Shop
M109A2
M109A3
2320-00-440-8313
2320-00-077-1636
2320-00-440-8308
2320-00-077-1637
Truck, Repair Shop
M185A2
M185A3
4940-00-987-8799
4940-00-077-1638
4940-00-987-8800
4940-00-077-1639
Truck, Tractor
M275A1
M275A2
2320-00-446-2479
2320-00-077-1640
2320-00-077-1641
Truck, Dump
M342A2
2320-00-077-1643
2320-00-077-1644
Truck, Maintenance, Pipeline
Construction
M756A2
2320-00-904-3277
Truck, Maintenance, Earth
Boring and Polesetting
M764
2320-00-937-5980
* This manual, together with TM 9-2320-209-10-2, 26 September 1980; TM 9-2320-209-10-3,
26 September 1980; and TM 9-2320-209-10-4, 26 September 1980, supersedes TM 9-2320-209-10/1,
29 October 1976.
i
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
REPORTING OF ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS
You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know
of a way to improve the procedure, please let us know. Mail your letter,
DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publication and Blank Forms) , or
DA Form 2028-2 located in the back of this manual direct to: Commander,
U.S. Army Tank Automotive Materiel Readiness Command, ATTN : DRSTAMBA, Warren, Michigan 48090. A reply will be furnished to you.
Paragraph
CHAPTER 1.
CHAPTER 2.
Section I.
Section II.
ii
INTRODUCTION
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forms and Records . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Improvement Report and
Maintenance Digest (EIR MD) and
Equipment Improvement Report and
Maintenance Summary (EIR MS) . . . . .
Reporting Improvement Recommendations . .
Metric System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Destruction to Prevent Enemy Use . . . . .
Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle /Bridge Classification . . . . . . .
DESCRIPTION AND DATA
Functional Description
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall Equipment Functional Description . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission System . . . . . . . . .
Transfer System . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Power Takeoff System . . .
Transfer Power Takeoff System . . . . .
Propeller Shafts . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering System . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . .
Axle, Wheels and Hubs . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Equipment and Accessories . . .
Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall Equipment Physical Description . . .
Engine . .
Clutch.................................
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel and Air Intake System . . . . . . .
Page
1-2
1-1
1-1
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-6
1-6
1-1
2-1
2-2
2-2a
2-2b
2-2c
2-2d
2-2e
2-2f
2-2g
2-2h
2-2i
2-2j
2-2k
2-21
2-2m
2-2n
2-2o
2-3
2-4
2-4a
2-4b
2-4c
2-4d
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-5
2-6
2-7
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III.
CHAPTER 3.
CHAPTER 4.
Section I.
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission .
. . . . .
Transmission Power Takeoff. . . . .
Transfer
Transfer Power Takeoff . . . . . . . . . .
Propeller and Drive Shaft Systems . . . .
Steering System. . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System
. . .
Axles, Wheels, and Hubs . . ..............
Tabulated Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions: . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Inflation Data . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Characteristics . . . . . .
Functional Characteristics . . . . . . . .
Components of End Item List . . . . . . .
Additional Authorization List . . . . . . .
Expendable Supplies and Materials List . .
SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF EQUI PMENT
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-in Operation . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Road Test. . . . . . . . . . . . .
After the Road Test . . . . . . . . .
OPERATING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . .
Description and Use of Operator’s Controls
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chassis Controls and Indicators . . . . .
Instrument Panel Controls and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Controls and Indicators . . .
Driver’s Compartment Controls and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Winch Controls and Indicators . .
Trailer Brake Controls and Indicators. .
Equipment Bodv Controls and Indicators . .
Fuel Tank Trucks (M49A1C and M49A2C)
Controls and Indicators . . . . . .
Water Tank Trucks Controls and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shop Van and Instrument Repair
Shop Trucks Controls and Indicators .
Paragraph
Page
2-4e
2-4f
2-4g
2-4h
2-4i
2-4j
2-4k
2-41
2-4m
2-4n
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-8
2-9
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
2-21
3-1
3-2
3-2a
3-2b
3-2C
3-2d
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
4-1
4-2
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2a
4-2b
4-2
4-4
4-2c
4-2d
4-2e
4-3
4-5
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-3a
4-11
4-3b
4-13
4-3c
4-15
...
111
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Tractor Trucks Controls and Indicators . .
Dump Truck Controls and Indicators . . .
Pipeline Construction Truck Controls . . .
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth Boring Machine and Polesetter
Truck Controls and Indicators . . . . .
S p e c i a l Kits Controls and Indicators . . . . .
Hot Water Personnel Heater Kit Controls
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . .
Arctic Winterization Kit Controls
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . .
Deep Water Fording Kit Controls
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric Brake Kit Controls
and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . .
Section II. Operation Under Usual Conditions
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Operating Procedures . . . . . . .
Before Engine Startup . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Engine Above +20°F . . . . .
Cold Weather Starting Below +20°F . . . .
Placing and Keeping the Truck in Motion. .
Stopping the Truck and Engine . . . . .
Operation of Front Winch . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . .
Unwinding the Winch Line . . . . . . .
Lifting or Pulling . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the Winch . . . . . . . . . .
Lowering Load or Unwinding Slack Cable. .
Winding the Winch Line on the Drum . . .
Locking the Front Winch for Travel . . .
Operation of Cargo Trucks . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Front and Side Racks . . .
Installing the Front and Side Racks . . .
Removing the Front and Side Racks from
Dropside Type Cargo Trucks . . . . .
Lowering the Dropsides on Dropside Type
Cargo Trucks . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Dropsides, Tailgate
or Both. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the Dropsides, Tailgate, Side
Racks and Front Racks . . . . . . . .
Operation of Fuel Tank Trucks . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gravity Filling the Tank Sections . . . .
Suction Filling the Tank Sections or Transferring Fuel from One Source to
Another through Pump . . . . . . . .
iv
Paragraph
Page
4-3d
4-3e
4-17
4-18
4- 3f
4-19
4-3g
4- 4
4-20
4-23
4-4a
4-23
4-4b
4-24
4-4c
4-27
4-4d
4-5
4-6
4-6a
4-6b
4-6c
4-6d
4-6e
4-7
4-7a
4-7b
4-7c
4-7d
4-7e
4-7f
4-7g
4-7h
4-8
4-8a
4-8b
4-8c
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-37
4-41
4-43
4-55
4-58
4-58
4-58
4-59
4-65
4-69
4-70
4-72
4-75
4-77
4-77
4-77
4-80
4-8d
4-83
4-8e
4-88
4-8f
4-93
4-8g
4-9
4-9a
4-9b
4-95
4-98
4-98
4-98
4-9c
4-110
TM 9-2320 -209-10-1
Paragraph
Power Discharging the Tank Sections .
Checking Condition of Filter . . . .
Gravity Discharging the Tank Sections
Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation of Water Tank Trucks . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gravity Filling the Tank Sections . . .
Suction Filling the Tank Sections and
Transferring Water from One Location
to Another . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydrant Filling the Tank Sections . .
Power Discharging the Tank Sections .
Gravity Discharging the Tank Sections
Page
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-9d
4-9e
4-9f
4-9g
4-10
4-10a
4-10b
4-131
4-139
4-143
4-151
4-156
4-156
4-157
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-10c
4-10d
4-10e
4-l0f
4-161
4-175
4-186
4-192
.
.
4-l0g
4-195
.
.
4-11
4-202
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-11a
4-1lb
4-llc
4-202
4-209
4-210
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-lld
4-1le
4-12
4-12a
4-12b
4-12c
4-13
4-13a
4-13b
4-13c
4-212
4-216
4-217
4-217
4-217
4-231
4-235
4-235
4-236
4-238
. .
. .
. .
.
. .
. .
. .
. .
4-13d
4-13e
4-13f
4-14
4-14a
4- 14b
4-14c
4-244
4-247
4-252
4-257
4-257
4-257
4-271
.
.
.
.
4-14d
4-14e
4-278
4-291
.
.
4-14f
4-302
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-15
4-15a
4-15b
4-311
4-311
4-311
Operating Water Tank Trucks
During Freezing Temperatures . . . .
Operation of Shop Van and Instrument Repair
Shop Van Trucks. . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing Shop Van and Instrument Repair
Shop Van for Use. . . . . . . . .
Supplying 115-Volt AC Power to Shop Van
Operating the Exhaust Blower . . . . .
Operating the Dome and Blackout Dome
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplying Power to Moulding Receptacles
Operation of Tractor Trucks . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coupling the Semitrailer . . . . . . .
Uncoupling the Semitrailer . . . . . .
Operation of Dump Trucks . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rigging the Tailgate . . . . . . . .
Loading the Dump Truck . . . . . . .
Unloading the Dump Truck with Body
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading the Dump Truck by Dumping .
Unloading the Dump Truck by Spreading
Operation of Pipeline Construction Truck . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the Rear Winch . . . . . . .
Rigging the A-Frame for Rear Operation .
Lowering the A-Frame and Preparing . .
Truck for Travel after Rear Operation .
Rigging the A-Frame for Side Operation .
Lowering the A-Frame and Preparing
Truck for Travel after Side Operation .
Operation of Earth Boring Machine and
Polesetter Trucks . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing the Truck for Boring Operation
v
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Paragraph
Raising, Leveling, and Lowering the
Derrick Tube .
. .
Operating and Securing the Rear Winch... . .
Installing 9-inch, 12-inch, and 16-inch
Augers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing 20-inch and 30-inch Augers . . .
Operating the Earth Boring Machine. . . .
Boring in Various Soils . . . . . . . . .
Preparing Boring Machine for Travel . . .
Dragging Poles. . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Poles. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulling Poles. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Collapsible Cable Reel . . . . .
Operation of Hot Water Personnel Heater Kit. .
Operation of Arctic Winterization Kit . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the Winterfront Cover . . . . .
Using the Quilted Engine Compartment
Cover
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating the Fuel Burning Personnel
Heater
.
. . . . . . . .
Operating the Fuel Burning Power Plant
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Slave Receptacle . . . . . . .
Operating the Deep Water Fording Kit . . . .
Operating the Electric Brake Kit . . . . . .
Section III. Operation Under Unusual Conditions
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in Extremely Cold Weather . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Publications . . . . . . . . . .
Winterization Kits . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving the Truck . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in Extreme Hot Weather . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . .
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Body and Chassis . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking the Truck . . . . . . . . .
Operation on Unusual Terrain . . . . . . .
Deep Snow or Mud . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Baked Sand. . . . . . . . . . .
Ice
. . . . . . . .
Dusty or Sandy Roads . . . . . . . .
Rocks and Boulders . . . . . . . . . .
High Altitudes . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
.
.
4-15c
4-15d
4-315
4-322
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-15e
4-15f
4-15g
4-15h
4-15i
4-15j
4-15k
4-15l
4-15m
4-16
4-17
4-17a
4-17b
4-329
4-331
4-337
4-347
4-352
4-362
4-365
4-369
4-373
4-383
4-384
4-384
4-384
.
4-17c
4-385
.
4-17d
4-386
.
.
.
.
4-17e
4-17f
4-18
4-19
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-22a
4-22b
4-22c
4-22d
4-22e
4-22f
4-23
4-23a
4-23b
4-23c
4-23d
4-23e
4-24
4-24a
4-24b
4-24c
4-24d
4-24e
4-24f
4-391
4-395
4-398
4-403
4-404
4-404
4-404
4-404
4-404
4-404
4-404
4-405
4-406
4-407
4-408
4-408
4-408
4-408
4-408
4-409
4-409
4-409
4-409
4-409
4-410
4-410
4-410
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Paragraph
Fording Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fording, Water Tank Trucks . . . . . .
After Fording . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Vehicle After Fording . . . . . .
Accidental Submersion. . . . . . . . .
Emergency Procedures . . . . . . . .
Using Slave Receptacle to Start the
Engine
. . . . . . . .
Using Jumper Cables to Start the
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing the Truck to Start Engine . . . . . .
Highway Towing (M44A2 Series Trucks) . .
Highway Towing (M44A1 Series Trucks) . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-25
4-25a
4-25b
4-25c
4-25d
4-25e
4-25f
4-26
4-410
4-410
4-411
4-413
4-417
4-418
4-418
4-419
. .
4-26a
4-419
.
.
4-26b
4-26c
4-26d
4-26e
4-419
4-423
4-426
4-428
A-1
A-1a
A-lb
A-2
A-3
A-3a
A-3b
A-1
A-1
A-1
A-1
A-1
A-1
A-2
B-1
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-1
B-1
B-1
B-1
B-3
B-4
B-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
. .
APPENDIX A. REFERENCES
Publication Indexes and General R e f e r e n c e . . .
Military Publications Indexes . . . . . . . .
General Reference . . . . . . . . . . .
Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Publications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX B . COMPONENTS OF END ITEM LIST
Section I . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of Columns . . . . . . . . . .
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Section II. Integral Components of the End Item . . . . . .
Section III. Basic Issue Items . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX C . ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
Section 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of Listing . . . . . . . . . . .
Section II. Additional Authorization List
APPENDIX D. EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST.
Section 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of Columns . . . . . . . . . .
Section II. Expendable Supplies and Materials List. . . . .
INDEX
.
.
.
Page
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
C-2
C-3
D-1
D-2
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-3
D-1
D-1
D-1
D-2
Index 1
vii
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
VOLUME 2 of 4
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Page
CHAPTER 1.
2.
3.
4.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . .
CHECKOUT , ALINEMENT , AND ADJUSTMENT . .
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE OF MATERIAL USED
IN CONJUNCTION WITH MAJOR ITEMS . . . . .
. 1-1
. . 2-1
. 3-1
.
4-1
VOLUME 3 of 4
TROUBLESHOOTING
CHAPTER 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
viii
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1
TROUBLESHOOTING APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX
3-1
TEST EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING ROADMAPS . . . . . . . . . 5-1
FAULT SYMPTOM INDEXES
6-1
SAMPLE TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . .. . . 7-1
FUEL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
. 8-1
COOLING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE . 9-1
TRANSMISSION SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
TRANSFER SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...11-1
FRONT AXLE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES
12-1
REAR AXLE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...13-1
BRAKE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . 14-1
WHEEL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . 15-1
STEERING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES
16-1
OUTRIGGER TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES,
TRUCK M764 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...17-1
FRONT WINCH TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . 18-1
REAR WINCH TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
TRUCK M764 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...19-1
REAR WINCH TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES,
TRUCK M756A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...20-1
DUMP TRUCK TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . 21-1
VOLUME 4 of 4
MAINTENANCE
Page
CHAPTER 1.
2.
Section I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII .
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . .
EQUIPMENT GROUP MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Equipment Items Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheels Equipment Items Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Equipment Items Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winch Equipment Items Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Body Equipment Items Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Purpose Kits Equipment Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-14
2-32
2-35
2-43
2-54
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
Title
Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6 x 6 Cargo Truck, M35A1, M35A2,
M35A2C , M36A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6 x 6 Fuel Servicing Tank Truck
(M49A1C , M49A2C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6 x 6 Water Tank Truck (M50A1,
M50A2, M50A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6 x 6 Truck Mounted Instrument
Repair Shop (M185A2, M185A3) or Truck Mounted
Van (M109A2, M109A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6 x 6 Tractor Truck, (M275A1, M275A2). . . .
Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6 x 6 Dump Truck (M342A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6 x 6 Pipeline Construction Truck
(M756A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6 x 6 Earth Boring Machine and
Polesetter Truck (M764) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overall Equipment Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Components Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch Components Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical System Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel and Air Intake System Components Location . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
ix
TM 9-2320- 209-10-1
Figure
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
B-1
B-2
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-4
B-5
B-5
B-5
B-5
B-6
B-6
B-7
x
Title
Cooling System Components Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust System Component Location (LDS 427-2 Engines). . . .
Exhaust System Component Location (M50A1 and M50A2
Trucks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust System Component Location (LD 465-1-lC Engine). . .
Exhaust System , Stack Type, Components Location
(LD 465-lC and LDT 465-lC Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust System Component Location (M49A 2C Fuel
Tankers and M275 Tractor Trucks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Power Takeoff Systems Component
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propeller and Drive Shafts System Component Location
(Trucks with Winch except M49, M50, and M764). . . . . . . . . . . .
Propeller and Drive Shafts System Component Location
(M49, M50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propeller and Drive Shafts System Component Location
(M764) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering System Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake System Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axles, Wheels, and Hubs System Component Location
Repair Shop Truck (M185A2, M185A3) Tools and
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Tools and Equipment ( Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Tools and Equipment (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Truck (M49A1C , M49A2C) Tools and Equipment. . . . . . . . .
Water Truck (M50A1, M50A2, M50A3) Tools and
Equipment (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Water Truck (M50A1, M50A2, M50A3) Tools and
Equipment (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shop Van (M185A2, M185A3) Tools and Equipment
(Sheet 1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shop Van (M185A2, M185A3) Tools and Equipment
(Sheet 2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .
Shop Van (M185A2, M185A3) Tools and Equipment
(Sheet 3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shop Van (M185A2, M185A3) Tools and Equipment
(Sheet 4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipeline Construction Truck (M765A 2) Tools and
Equipment (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipeline Construction Truck ( M756A 2) Tools and
Equipment (Sheet 20 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .
Earth Boring and Polesetting Truck (M764) Tools
and Equipment ( Sheet 1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-20
B-4
B-6
B-8
B-10
B-12
B-14
B-16
B-18
B-20
B-22
B-24
B-26
B-28
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Figure
B-7
B-7
B-8
Page
Title
Earth Boring and Polesetting Truck (M764) Tools
and Equipment (Sheet 2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth Boring and Polesetting Truck (M764) Tools
and Equipment (Sheet 3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipeline Construction Truck (M 756A 2) and Earth
Boring and Polesetting Truck (M764) Tools and
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-30
B-32
B-34
LIST OF TABLES
Number
1-1
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
Page
Title
Vehicle Class Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight (Pounds) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions (Inches) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Inflation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissible Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Speeds in Mph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine and Radiator Data . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Lights Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight of Material in Truck. . . . . . . . . . .
Boring Machine Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Speed Settings for Soil Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1-6
2-22
2-22
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-26
2-26
4-45
4-235
4-339
4-341
xi/(xii blank)
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
SCOPE. This Technical Manual contains operating instructions for the 2 l/2-ton,
1-1.
6x6 M44A1 and M44A2 series trucks (figures 1-1 through 1-8) equipped with multifuel
engines, and operator level maintenance instructions in accordance with the Maintenance
Allocation Chart. Operating instructions for special purpose kits used with these trucks
are also included. The purpose of this manual is to give the operator the information he
needs for safe, trouble-free operation of the equipment under usual and unusual conditions.
1-2.
FORMS AND RECORDS. Maintenance forms, records, and reports which are to be
used by maintenance personnel at all levels are listed in and prescribed by TM 38-750.
1-3.
EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT REPORT AND MAINTENANCE DIGEST (EIR MD)
AND EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT REPORT AND MAINTENANCE E SUMMARY (EIR MS).
The quarterly Equipment Improvement Report and Maintenance Digest, TB 43-0001-39
series, contains valuable field information on the equipment covered in this manual. The
information in the TB 43-0001-39 series is compiled from some of the Equipment Improvement Reports that you prepared on the vehicles covered in this manual. Many of these
articles result from comments, suggestions, and improvement recommendations that you
submitted to the EIR program. The TB 43-0001-39 series contains information on equipment improvements, minor alterations, proposed Modification Work Orders (MWO’s),
warranties (if applicable), actions taken on some of your DA Form 2028's (Recommended
Changes to Publications), and advance information on proposed changes that may affect
this manual. In addition, the more maintenance significant articles, including minor
alterations, field-fixes, etc, that have a more permanent and continuing need in the field
are republished in the Equipment Improvement Report and Maintenance Summary (EIR MS)
for TARCOM Equipment (TM 43-0143). Refer to both of these publications (TB 43-0001-39
series and TM 43-0143) periodically, especially the TB 43-0001-39 series, for the most
current and authoritative information on your equipment. The information will help you
in doing your job better and will help in keeping you advised of the latest changes to this
manual. Also refer to DA Pam 310-4, Index of Technical Publications, and Appendix A,
References, of this manual.
1-4.
REPORTING IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS. If your truck needs improvement, let us know. Send us an EIR. YOU , the user, are the only one who can tell us what
you don’t like about your equipment. Let us know why you don’t like the design. Tell us
why a procedure is hard to perform. Put it on an SF 368 (Quality Deficiency Report).
Mail it to us at: Commander, U. S. Army Tank Automotive Materiel Readiness Command,
ATTN: DRSTA-MT, Warren, Michigan 48090. We’ll send you a reply.
METRIC SYSTEM. The equipment/system described herein is nonmetric and does
1-5.
not require metric common or special tools. Therefore, metric units are not supplied.
Tactical instructions, for sake of clarity, will also remain nonmetric.
DESTRUCTION TO PREVENT ENEMY USE. Follow procedures given in
1-6.
TM 750-244-6 for destruction of Army materiel to prevent enemy use.
1-1
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Figure 1-1. Typical 2 1/2-Ton 6x6 Cargo Truck
(M35A1, M35A2, M35A2C, M36A2) .
Figure 1-2. Typica1 21/2-Ton 6x6 Fuel Servicing Tank Truck
(M49A1C, M49A2C).
1-2
TM 9-2320-2O9-10-1
Figure 1-3.
Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6x6 Water Tank Truck
(M50A1, M50A2, M50A3).
Figure
1-4, Typical 2 1/2-Ton 6x6 Truck Mounted Instrument Repair Shop (M185A2,
—
M185A3) or Truck Mounted Van (M109A2, M109A3).
1-3
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Figure 1-5. Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6x6 Tractor Truck
(M275A1, M275A2) .
Figure 1-6. Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6x6 Dump Truck
(M342A2).
1-4
TM 9-2320 -209-10-1
Figure 1-7. Typical 2 l/2-Ton 6x6 Pipeline Construction Truck
(M756A2).
Figure 1-8. Typical 2 1/2-Ton 6x6 Earth Boring Machine and Polesetter Truck
(M764)
1-5
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1-7.
MANUAL ORGANIZATION. This manual is divided into four volumes. Volumes are
divided into chapters and sections depending on the amount of subject material. The content
of each volume is as follows:
Volume 1. TM 9-2320-209-10-1, Operation, Installation, and Reference Data.
Volume 2. TM 9-2320-209-10-2, Scheduled Maintenance.
Volume 3. TM 9-2320-209-10-3, Troubleshooting.
Volume 4. TM 9-2320-209-10-4, Maintenance.
VEHICLE /BRIDGE CLASSIFICATION. Refer to table 1-1 and find your vehicle class
1-8.
number. Table columns are marked as follows:
E - Class number of vehicle with no payload.
C - Class number of vehicle with cross-country payload.
H - Class number of vehicle with highway payload.
a. Bridges along your route may be marked with a class number. The bridge class
number shows the-safe capacity of the bridge. If your vehicle class number is equal to or
less than the bridge class number, the bridge will hold your vehicle. If your vehicle class
number is greater than the bridge class number, your vehicle is too heavy for the bridge;
DO NOT CROSS.
b.
For more information refer to FM 5-36.
Table 1-1. Vehicle Class Information
1-6
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Table 1-1. Vehicle Class Information - Cont
Class Number
Vehicle
Model
NSN
E
C
H
M50A2
2320-00-077-1633 and
2320-00-077-1634
7
7
9
9
11
11
M50A3
2320-00-037-4036 and
2320-00-937-5264
6
6
8
8
10
10
M109A2
2320-00-440-8313
2320-00-440-8308
and
7
7
9
9
10
10
M109A3
2320-00-077-1636
2320-00-077-1637
and
7
7
9
9
10
10
M185A2
4940-00-987-8799 and
4940-00-987-8800
4940–00–077–1638 and
4940-00-077-1639
7
*
10
*
10
*
7
8
10
10
11
11
M275A1
2320-00-446-2479
5†
M275A2
2320-00-077-1640
2320-00-077-1641
and
5
5
8
9
11
11
Dump
M342A2
2320-00-077-1643
2320-00-077-1644
and
7
7
9
9
12
12
Pipeline Construction
M756A2
2320-00-904-3277
7
10
13
Earth Boring and
Polesetting
M764
2320-00-937-5980
9
9
Water Tank - Cont
Shop Van
Repair Shop
M185A3
Tractor
10
* Information to be supplied when it becomes available.
† Tractor only (without semitrailer).
Weight of semitrailer and payload must be known
to determine class number.
1-7/(1-8 blank)
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
CHAPTER 2
DESCRIPTION AND DATA
Section I. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
2-1.
GENERAL. The 2 l/2-ton, 6x6 M44A1 and M44A2 series trucks are tactical vehicles designed for use on all types of roads, highways, and cross country terrain. They
will ford hard bottom water crossings up to 30 inches deep without special fording equipment. The following paragraphs are provided to give the operator an overall understanding
of the equipment and its main functions. The descriptive text is keyed to an overall equipment block diagram, which shows each functional group of the equipment as a block,
Arrows are used to show the flow of power to and from each functional block on the diagram,
WARNING
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within the
limits specified in this TM. Operation beyond these limits is prohibited IAW
AR 70-1 without written approval from the Commander, U.S. Army TankAutomotive Command, ATTN: AMSTA-CM-S, Warren, MI 48397-5000.
2-2.
OVERALL EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION. (See Fig. 2-1,)
a .Engine.
The engine functions to supply power to move the truck and operate equipment and accessories.
b. Clutch. The clutch by means of mechanical linkage, connects power produced by the
engine, to the transmission. The clutch also separates power from the transmission when
not needed, or while shifting transmission gears.
c. Electrical System. The electrical system supplies electrical current to start the
engine, operate lights, equipment and accessories, and to charge the batteries.
d. Fuel System. The fuel system functions to store fuel in tanks, deliver fuel to the
engine, as required, and return excess fuel to the tanks.
e . Cooling System. The cooling system functions to remove excess heat produced
while the engine is running, and to keep the engine at normal operating temperature. The
cooling system also supplies heat to warm the cab or personnel compartment, when required.
f. Exhaust System. The exhaust system functions to collect and remove exhaust gasses
produced when the engine is operating. The exhaust system also supplies heat necessary to
heat water in water tank trucks, when required.
g . Transmission System. The transmission system gives the operator a choice of five
forward gear combinations (speeds), reverse, and neutral position for operating the truck
efficiently at all speeds and conditions.
h . Transfer System. The transfer system sends power from transmission to propeller
shafts to drive front and rear wheels. The system gives an additional gear combination
(speed) for each transmission speed.
i.
Transmission Power Take-off System. This system transmits power to propeller
shafts to operate auxiliary equipment.
j . Transfer Power Take-off System. This system transmits power from the transfer
unit to propeller shafts to operate auxiliary equipment and accessories.
k. Propeller Shafts. Propeller shafts are used to transmit power from transmission
to the transfer system and from transfer system to axles. Propeller shafts also transmit
power from power take-off assemblies to auxiliary equipment and accessories.
Change 2 2-1
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
l . Steering System. When the operator turns steering wheel, the steering system
sends this action to front wheels. This system functions to control direction of truck
while in motion.
m. Brake System. When the operator steps on service brake pedal, brake system
functions to slow down or stop truck. A handbrake, when set to up position by the
operator, is used for parking vehicle.
n . Axles, Wheels, and Hubs. The axles support the weight of the truck a n d
transmit power to the hubs to turn the wheels. The front and both rear axles are powered (live) axles.
o . Auxiliary Equipment and Accessories. These components perform required tasks,
such as pulling, lifting, earth b oring, heating, towing and fording.
Section II. PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION
2-3.
GENERAL. Three basic wheelbase chassis are available for mounting various
body types, (cargo, dump, tankers, vans, tractor, earth boring and pole setting, and
pipeline construction bodies). The following paragraph will describe systems, units,
and components of the various trucks. The diagrams show location of these items on
the vehicle.
2-4.
OVERALL EQUIPMENT PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION.
a. Engine. M44A1 and M44A2 series trucks are equipped with US Army LDS 427-2,
LD 465-1, and LD465-lC six-cylinder in-line, liquid-cooled. multifuel engines. The multifuel engine (fig. 2-2) uses the fuel injection compression ignition principle which permits
the use of various grades of fuel. Refer to Table 2-6, for fuel grades to be used.
2-2
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Figure 2-1. Overall Equipment Block Diagram.
2-3
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1. Manifold
5. Flywheel housing
2. Block
6. Oil pan
3. Cylinder head
7. Crankcase
4. Oil filter
Figure 2-2. Engine Components Location.
2-4
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b. Clutch. The clutch (fig. 2-3) has two plates (disks), one attached to the flywheel of
the engine, the other connected to the transmission. The disks are pressed together by a
pressure plate. When the engine is running, the disk attached to the flywheel drives the
disk attached to the transmission, turning the gears in the transmission. The plates are
separated when the operator steps down on the clutch pedal. The gears in the transmission
stop turning to let the operator shift gears.
1. Clutch pedal
3. Clutch
2. Clutch linkage
Figure 2-3. Clutch Components Location.
2-5
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c. Electrical System. The electrical system (fig. 2-4) is a 24-volt dc system .
Two 12-volt storage batteries are connected in series with the negative terminal
grounded. The engine starter motor operates directly from the 24-volt source. The
system uses a belt-driven, 24-volt generator having an output capacity of 25 amperes.
A battery-generator indicator is located on the instrument panel. Wiring harnesses
are used to carry current to operate equipment and accessories. Circuit breakers are
included to protect circuits from overload.
1.
Trailer coupling
8.
Lights
2.
Horn button
9.
Generator
3.
Gages and controls
10.
Oil pressure gage sending unit
4.
Regulator
11.
Batteries
5.
Manifold air heater ignition unit
12.
Ground strap
6.
Starter
13.
Fuel level gage sending unit
7.
Water temperature gage
sending unit
Figure 2-4. Electrical System Component Location
2-6
TM 9-2320 -209-10-1
d. Fuel and Air Intake System. The fuel and air intake system (fig. 2-5) includes an
intake manifold heater, air cleaner, fuel tanks, fuel pump, primary and secondary fuel
filters, injection pump, nozzle, fuel lines and fittings, accelerator pedal and linkage,
engine stop, and hand throttle.
TA 044898
1. Fuel tank
8. Filters
2. Fuel lines
9. Turbocharger
3. Air cleaner
10. supply pump
4. Throttle control
11. Fuel injector nozzles and holder
5. Engine stop control
12. Fuel return connectors
6. Manifold heater
13. Accelerator controls and linkages
7. Injection pump
14. Fuel pump
Figure 2-5. Fuel and Air Intake System Components Location.
2-7
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e. Cooling System. The cooling system (fig. 2-6) is a sealed-type system made
up of the radiator, fan, drive belts, thermostat, water pump , temperature gage,
pressure-type filler cap, thermostat bypass line connecting the radiator to the engine,
and the water pump.
1.
Thermostat housing
4.
Fan and fan belt
2.
Shroud
5.
Water pump
3.
Radiator and cap
Figure 2-6.
2-8
Cooling System Components Location.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Exhaust System. There are different exhaust system setups used on the trucks
f.
covered in this manual. The following paragraphs note the differences in exhaust systems
used with particular engines, or with certain trucks.
(1) On vehicles with LDS 427-2 engines (fig. 2-7), the exhaust manifold empties
directly into the turbo-supercharger. The pressurized exhaust gasses drive the turbosupercharger and pass from the turbo-supercharger outlet through an exhaust pipe assembly.
The pipe assembly extends back along the right side of the truck, to the outlet, located
between the right tandem wheels.
1. Turbo-supercharger
2. Exhaust pipes
Figure 2-7. Exhaust System Component Location (LDS 427-2 Engines).
2-9
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(2) The M50A1 and M50A2 (fig. 2-8) water tank trucks have an exhaust bypass valve
and a bypass fording valve. The exhaust bypass valve is opened to let exhaust gasses heat
the water in the tanks. The bypass fording valve is used to close off the heating chamber.
under the tanks, while fording.
1.
Manifold
2. Exhaust pipe
3. Exhaust bypass valve
4. Muffler
5. Tailpipe
Bypass fording valve
(deep water fording only)
Figure 2-8. Exhaust System Component Location (M50A1 and M50A2 Trucks).
2-10
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(3) On earlier model M44A2 series trucks with LD465-1 and LD465-lC engines,
the exhaust system (fig. 2-9) is made up of front and rear exhaust pipes, muffler, and tailpipe. The exhaust pipes are connected directly to the manifold.
1. Manifold
3. Muffler
2. Exhaust pipe
4. Tailpipe
Figure 2-9. Exhaust System Component Location (LD 465-1-1C Engine).
2-11
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(4) On later model M44A2 series trucks with LD465-1C and LDT 465-1C engines
(except M50A2 water tankers), a stack-type exhaust system is used. The upper exhaust
pipe (stack) is mounted on the right side of truck and extends above cab top.
Figure 2-10. Exhaust System Stack Type, Component location, (LD 465-1C
and LDT 465-1C Engines).
2-12
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(5) The exhaust system on M49A2C fuel tanker and M275 tractor trucks
(fig. 2-11) includes a spark-arrestor-type muffler, which traps exhaust sparks from the
engine.
TA
1. Exhaust shield
3. Muffler
2. Lower exhaust pipe
4. Upper exhaust pipe
044904
Figure 2-11. Exhaust System Component Location (M49A2C Fuel
Tankers and M275 Tractor Trucks).
2-13
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
g . Transmission. The transmission (fig. 2-12) is a manually operated synchromesh
type, mounted on the rear of the engine. The transmission supplies one reverse and five
forward speeds.
h . Transmission Power Takeoff (Fig. 2-12). All trucks except dump truck, have
single-ended transmission power takeoff units. The dump truck has a double-ended unit.
(1) Single-ended unit is a two-speed-and-reverse drive, mounted on the left side of
the transmission. The power takeoff supplies power to the front winch. The power takeoff
is controlled by a shifting lever in the cab.
(2) Double-ended unit is mounted on the left side of the transmission. The forward
output shaft is a two-speed-and-reverse drive to the front winch with shifting lever in the
cab. The rear accessory drive shaft drives the hydraulic hoist pump on dump trucks and
is controlled by the drivers hydraulic hoist control lever in the cab.
i. Transfer. The transfer (fig. 2-12) is a two-speed synchromesh unit driven by the
transmission through a propeller shaft. The transfer drives propeller shafts connected to
the front and rear wheels. The handbrake drum is mounted on the transfer rear output
companion shaft.
j . Transfer Power Takeoff. The transfer power takeoff (fig. 2-12) is attached to the
rear of the transfer, and is controlled by a lever in the cab. The unit functions to supply
power to auxiliary equipment.
1 . Front transmission gear shift lever
4.
Transfer assembly
2. Transmission power takeoff shifting lever
5.
6.
Transmission assembly
3.
Transfer power takeoff lever (all
except M342A2)
4.
Hydraulic hoist control lever (on M342A2)
Transmission power
takeoff assembly
Figure 2-12. Transmission Power Takeoff System Component Location.
2-14
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
k. Propeller and Drive Shaft Systems.
Except on M49 and M50 tank trucks, all
drive shafts are double universal joint type. Tank trucks shafts are solid and supported
on each end by a flange and pillow-block with a bearing assembly. Figures 2-13, 2-14,
and 2-15 give the shafts and locations for the different model trucks.
1. Front axle propeller shaft assembly
4. Hydraulic hoist pump drive shaft
(on M342A2)
2. Intermediate propeller shaft
(except M342A2)
3. Rear axle propeller drive shaft
5. Transfer propeller shaft assembly
6. Front drive shaft assembly
Figure 2-13. Propeller and Drive Shafts System Component
Location (Trucks with Winch except M49, M50, and M764).
2-15
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Front axle propeller shaft assembly
2.
Forward rear axle propeller shaft
3.
Rear rear axle drive shaft
4.
Delivery pump rear drive shaft
5.
Delivery pump intermediate drive
shaft (M49 only)
6.
Delivery pump front drive shaft
(M50 only)
7.
Transfer propeller shaft assembly
Figure 2-14. Propeller and Drive Shafts System Component Location (M49, M50).
2-16
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Front axle propeller shaft assembly
5. Earth boring machine drive shaft
2.
Power-divider drive shaft assembly
6. Transfer propeller shaft assembly
3.
Forward rear axle drive shaft
7. Front winch drive shaft assembly
4.
Rear rear axle drive shaft
Figure 2-15.
Propeller and Drive Shafts System Component Location (M764).
2-17
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1. Steering System. The steering system (fig. 2-16) consists of a steering wheel, a
helical cam and lever-type steering gear, pitman arm, drag link and tie rods. Turning
motion applied to the steering wheel is sent through these components to steer the front
wheels.
1. Steering wheel
4. Pitman arm
2. Tie rods
5. Helical cam
3. Drag link
6. Steering gear
Figure 2-16.
2-18
Steering System Component Location.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
m. Brake System. The brake system (fig. 2-17) includes the service brakes and a handbrake. The compressed air system is covered here since it is part of the brake system.
(1) The service brake system, is an air-hydraulic system made up of a master
cylinder, air-hydraulic cylinder, individual hydraulic wheel cylinders, an air compressor,
air reservoirs, air lines, hydraulic lines and linkage, and trailer brake connections and
controls. The master cylinder contains hydraulic fluid. Pressure on the brake pedal is
transmitted to the air-hydraulic cylinder. The air-hydraulic cylinder increases pressure
to the wheel cylinders. The wheel cylinders expand and press the brake shoes against the
drum to slow or stop the truck.
(2) The handbrake system consists of a brake drum, mounted on the rear output
shaft of the transfer, and inner and outer brakeshoes operated by a single shoe lever. A
cable attached to the brake shoe lever runs through a protective casing to the handbrake
lever at the left of the driver’s seat.
(3) The compressed air system is used to supply air to the air-hydraulic cylinder,
windshield wiper motors, and trailer airbrakes. This system can also be used in an emergency to clean the air cleaner and inflate tires. When air pressure in the air reservoir tanks
is low, a buzzer is set off in the driver’s compartment to warn the operator.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Brake pedal
Air reservoir tanks
Brake lines
Trailer brake connection
Wheel cylinder
Handbrake assembly
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Master cylinder
Air hydraulic master cylinder
Service brake shoe
Linkage
Compressor
Figure 2-17. Brake System Component Location.
2-19
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
n.
Axles, Wheels and Hubs (Fig. 2-18).
(1) The front axle is made up of a housing, differential and pinion, axle shaft, with
universal joint, and steering knuckle. Power is sent from the differential to the wheels,
through the axle shaft. Universal joints permit continuous delivery of power to the wheels
while the truck is turning right or left.
(2) Both rear axles are made up of a housing, differential and carrier assembly,
and an axle shaft. Forward rear and rear rear axles are mounted, one behind the other,
with torque rods on each side of the interconnecting axles. Power is sent from the transfer
to the front rear differential by a propeller shaft, and from the forward rear axle to the rear
rear axle differential by another propeller shaft. Axle shafts transmit power from the
differential to the wheels.
(3) The wheels are disk-type, secured to six studs on the wheel hubs. The wheels
are completely interchangeable. Trucks with dual wheels use 9x20 size tires. Single
wheels use llx20 tires. Single wheels can be used on dual wheel trucks if there is enough
clearance between the tire and body under full payload.
(4) The wheel hubs are mounted on roller bearings. Each hub is secured to its
axle with two adjusting nuts and an adjusting nut lock. All hubs have inner seals, and rear
hubs also have an outer seal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Differential and carrier
Rear rear axle
Torque rods
Steering knuckle
Axle shaft with universal joint
Differential
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Front axle
Housing
Tires
Wheels
Hubs (behind wheels)
12. Front rear axle
Figure 2-18. Axles, Wheels, and Hubs System Component Location.
2-20
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III. TABULATED DATA
2-5.
GENERAL. This section contains reference data, in table form, for use by the
operator when using the equipment. Data is given for the following areas:
a.
Physical data
b.
Functional characteristics
c.
Capabilities and limitations
d.
Environmental characteristics
2-6.
WEIGHT. Table 2-1 gives the weight of all trucks covered in this manual under
various conditions. Column “Net w/wn” means trucks with winch.
2-7.
DIMENSIONS. Tables 2-2 and 2-3 give overall and operating dimensions for all
trucks covered in this manual.
2-8.
CAPACITIES. Table 2-4 gives the liquid capacities for various systems.
2-9.
TIRE INFLATION DATA. Table 2-5 gives tire inflation data for all trucks covered
in this manual.
2-10. ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS. Table 2-6 lists the fuels that can be used
in all trucks under various temperature conditions.
2-11. FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS. Tables 2-7 and 2-8 give data relating to the
functional characteristics of all trucks covered in this manual.
2-12. COMPONENTS OF END ITEM LIST. Integral components and basic issue items
required for 2 l/2-ton trucks are listed in appendix B.
2-13. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST. Additional items authorized for the support
of 2 l/2-ton trucks are listed in appendix C.
2-14. EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST. Expendable supplies and materials needed to operate and maintain the 2 1/2-ton trucks are listed in appendix D.
2-21
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Table 2-1. Weight (Pounds)
Truck
Type
Net
w/wn
Gross
Highway
M35A1
M35A2
M35A2C
M36A2
M49AlC
M49A2C
M50A1
M50A2
M50A3
M109A2
M109A3
M185A2
M185A3
M275A1
M275A2
M342A2
M756A2
M764
13,530
13,530
13,530
15,750
16,107
14,740
15,255
14,589
15,150
16,296
15,430
17,485
17,300
12,534
12,226
15,500
16,960
19,490
23,530
23,530
23,530
25,510
23,665
22,840
23,855
22,930
23,450
20,642
22,930
22,487
24,800
23,124
24,226
25,500
24,020
24, 690
Gross
CrossCountry
18,530
18,530
18,530
20,750
19,992
19,930
22,067
22,300
19, 124
18,790
20,500
18,960
18,690
Payload
Highway
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
1,200 gal
1,200 gal
1,000 gal
1,000 gal
1,000 gal
7,500
7,500
5,350
7,500
12,000
12,000
10,000
8,000
8,000
Payload
CrossCountry
5,000
5,000
5,000
5,000
600
600
400
400
500
5,000
5,000
5,000
5,000
7,000
7,000
5,000
2,000
2,000
gal
gal
gal
gal
gal
Towed
Load
Highway
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
8,000
10,000
8,000
36,000
36,000
10,000
10,000
10,000
Towed Load
Cross-Country
6,000
6,000
6,000
6,000
6,000
6,000
6,000
6,000
6,000
6,000
6,000
6,000
6,000
17,000
17,000
6,000
6,000
6,000
Subtract 500 pounds for trucks not equipped with front winch.
Table 2-2. Dimensions (Inches)
Truck
Type
Length
Overall
w/wn
Height
Overall
Height
Reduced
Minimum
Width
Overall
Pintle
Height
Ground
Clearance
M35A1
M35A2
M35A2C
M36A2
M49A1C
M49A2C
M50A1
M50A2
M50A3
M109A2
M109A3
M185A2
M185A3
M275A1
M275A2
M342A2
M756A2
M764
277
278 1/4
278 1/4
343 1/2
277
277
277
277
277
277
282
277
282
242
242
274
287
305
112
112
112
124 3/8
97
101 1/2
97
101 1/2
101 1/2
130
130
130
130
99
101 1/2
105
113
108
81
81
81
81
88
92
90
92
92
130
130
90
130
81
81
81
108
94
96
96
96
96
96
96
95
95
95
99
98
95
98
93
93
96
96
96
35
36 1/8
36 1/8
36 1/8
37
36 1/8
36
36 1/8
36 1/8
34
26 1/8
36
36 1/8
35
36 1/8
36 1/8
36 1/2
12 1/2
10 15/16
10 15/16
10 15/16
12 1/2
10 15/16
13
10 15/16
10 15/16
13
10 15/16
13
10 15/16
12 1/2
10 15/16
10 15/16
10 15/16
10 15/16
Subtract 14 inches from length for trucks not equipped with front winch.
2-22
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Table 2-3. Operating Dimensions
Truck Type
Cargo M35 type
Cargo M36 type
Fuel tank
Water tank
Shop van
Repair shop
Tractor
Dump
Pipeline construction
Earthboring and polesetter
Wheel
Base (in. )
154
190
154
154
154
154
142
154
154
154
Departure
Angle (deg)
40
24
40
40
40
40
73
70
40
40
Turning Radius
W/WN
37 ft 6 in.
46 ft
37 ft 6 in.
37 ft 6 in.
37 ft 6 in.
37 ft 6 in.
36 ft
37 ft 6 in.
37 ft 6 in.
37 ft 6 in.
WO/WN (ft)
36
45
36
36
36
36
35
36
36
36
Note: The approach angle for all trucks covered in this manual is 40 degrees with
winch and 47 degrees without winch.
Table 2-4. Capacities
Description
Capacity
Cooling system
LDS427-2
34 qt
28-32 qt
LD-465 & LDT465
22 qt
Crankcase
6 qt
Differentials (each)
50 gal
Fuel tank
10-1/2 pt
Transmission 1. W/PTO
Transmission 2. WO/PTO
8-1/2 pt
7 qt
Transfer
Front winch worm housing
1-1/4 pt
1 pt
Front winch end bearing frame
7 pt
Rear winch worm housing
Power divider
3-1/2 qt
Earth boring machine
intermediate case
5 qt
Earth boring machine
clutch and brake case
5 qt
Earth boring machine
boring case
10 qt
Outrigger hydraulic system
6 gal
Rear winch cable level winder
1-3/4 pt
speed reducer housing
1-3/4 pt
Rear winch jaw clutch housing
Rear winch worm gear housing 2-3/4 pt
Truck(s)
All trucks
All trucks
All trucks
All trucks
All trucks
All trucks
All trucks
All trucks equipped with front winch
All trucks equipped with front winch
M764
M764
M764
M764
M764
M764
M764
M756A2
M756A2
2-23
TM 9-2320 -209-10-1
Table 2-5. Tire Inflation Data
Condition/Tire Size
Pressure (psi)
50
70
35
15
Highway 9 x 20
Highway 11 x 20
Cross-country
Mud, snow, and sand
Table 2-6. Permissible Fuels
Ambient Temperature
Fuel
Primary Fuels
No Limit
Diesel fuel, VV-F-800, grade DF-A
(NATO code no. F-54)
Above -51° F
Turbine fuel, MIL-T-5624, grade JP-5
(NATO code no. F-44)
Above -10°F
Diesel fuel, VV-F -800, grade DF-1
(NATO code no. F-54)
Above +32 °F
Diesel fuel, VV-F-800, grade DF-2
(NATO code no. F-54)
Alternate Fuels
2-24
Above -76°F
Aviation gasoline, MIL-G-5572,
AVGAS 80/87 (NATO code no. F-12)
*
Commercial aviation gasoline
(ASTM D910), grade 80/87
*
Commercial gasoline, leaded, low lead, or unleaded, when research
octane number (RON) is 89 or below,
or octane number displayed on
retail gasoline pumps in CONUS is
85 or below
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Table 2-6. Permissible Fuels - Cont
Fuel
Ambient Temperature
Alternate Fuels
Above -58° F
Turbine fuel, aviation, kerosenetype, MIL-T-83133, grade JP-8
(NATO code no. F-34)
Above -46° F
Turbine fuel, low volatility,
MIL-T-38219, grade JP-7
*
Commercial aviation turbine fuel
(ASTM D1655), jet A and jet A-1
Above -10° F
Commercial diesel fuel (ASTM D975)
1-D and no. 1
Above +15ºF
Diesel fuel, MIL-F-16884
(NATO code no. F-75 or F-76)
Above +32° F
Commercial diesel fuel
(ASTM D975), 2-D and no. 2
Above +40° F
Distillate fuel, MIL-F-24397, ND
(NATO code no. F-85)
*
Any mixture of primary and/or
alternate fuels listed above
* Any temperature at which the fuel will flow.
CAUTION
Other fuels may be used to run multifuel engines. If
engine runs rough when using a new fuel, add 10% to 30%
diesel fuel to smooth engine performance. Failure to
add diesel fuel to smooth engine performance will result
in burned pistons.
2-25
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Table 2-7. Shifting Speeds in Mph
Transmission
1st gear
2nd gear
3rd gear
4th gear
5th gear
Reverse
9
16
27
44
56
9
5
8
14
22
28
5
Table 2-8.
Engine and Radiator Data
Attribute
Cylinders (in-line)
Brake horsepower
Ignition system
Firing order
Cooling
Thermostat:
Start to open
Fully open
2-26
Transfer High
Transfer Low
Specification
6
126-140 (gross at 2,600 rpm)
Compression
1-5-3 -6-2-4
Liquid
180° F
200° F
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
CHAPTER 3
SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF EQUIPMENT
3-1.
GENERAL. When a new, used or reconditioned truck is first received by the using
organization, it is the responsibility of the using organization to see that the truck has been
inspected and prepared for service by the supporting service unit. This will be shown on
DA Forms 2408-5, 2408-6, 2408-7 and 2408-8, which are a record of all services and corrective maintenance. If not done before, the following services must be done before placing
truck into service:
a. Lubricate the truck in accordance with lubrication order, LO 9-2320-209-12/1, regardless of interval, except for gearcases and engine crankcase.
b. Check processing tag for gearcase and engine oil, If tag shows that engine oil is
good for 500 miles of operation, and is the proper grade for local climate, check oil level
but do not change oil.
c. Schedule a second S preventive maintenance service on DD Form 314 Preventive
Maintenance Schedule and Record, and arrange for an oil change at 500 miles.
d. Services to be done by organizational maintenance personnel when trucks are received are designated in TM 9-2320-209-20. Whenever possible the operator will assist
organizational maintenance personnel in performing these services.
3-2.
BREAK IN OPERATION.
a. General. Before operating the truck, the operator must become familiar with the
truck controls and operation as given in chapter 4.
b. Break-in. When break-in of a new or rebuilt truck is done in normal service, the
operator is cautioned to take special care in performing all before-operation checks and
inspections given in Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services, volume 2, chapter 2, of
this manual. The following precautions must be taken during break-in:
(1) Do not go above the speed shown on the truck instruction and data plate, located
on the instrument panel, directly in f ront of the driver.
(2) Pick the best gear selection for the driving conditions. Do not skip speeds
when shifting gears.
(3) Avoid fast starts and stops.
(4) Avoid sudden stops (unless in an emergency).
(5) Avoid long runs under other than normal weather, and on rough terrain.
(6) Avoid sudden forced movement of an operating control.
(7) Avoid overheating the engine.
3-1
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(8) Avoid operating the engine or the power train at full speed.
CAUTION
During road test, do not go faster or operate the truck
continuously at the maximum allowable speeds shown on
the truck instruction and caution data plate.
c. Road test. All trucks received by the using organization must be road tested to
check their operation and condition. For all new or reconditioned trucks, except those
driven 50 miles or more during delivery, the road test will be a minimum of 50 miles.
For used trucks and trucks driven 50 miles or more during delivery, the road test will
be long enough to observe truck operation and conditions. The operator will look at the
instrument panel and gages, as often as possible, for signs of unsatisfactory performance.
Stops will be made at least every 10 miles to give the operator a chance to inspect the truck
for possible coolant, oil, fuel or exhaust leaks and any signs that may show the engine,
transmission, wheel hubs, brakedrums, axle differential or transfer assemblies are overheated. The truck must be checked throughly for any control hard to operate and any
instrument not operating properly. Unusual noises and vibrations will be noted. All
unusual conditions will be reported to organizational maintenance unit.
d. After the Road Test. After the road test, fix any faulty condition which can be
done at operator's maintenance level. Tell organizational maintenance unit about any
other faulty conditions.
3-2
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
CHAPTER 4
OPERATING PROCEDURES
Section 1.
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR’S CONTROLS
AND INDICATORS
4-1. GENERAL. Before trying to operate equipment, be sure you know where all controls and indicators are located, what each control does, and what information each
indicator is giving.
NOTE
Controls and indicators described in this section are generally the same for all
trucks covered in this manual, except
where specifically noted.
In this manual the term "left" is the driver's side. The
term "right" is the opposite side.
4-1
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-2.
CHASSIS CONTROLS AND INDICATORS.
a. Instrument Panel Controls and Indicators.
INSTRUMENT PANEL LEFT SIDE
1. Hand THROTTLE control. Sets
engine to any speed without stepping
on accelerator pedal. When hand
THROTTLE control knob is pulled
out it locks in any position. Turning
knob right or left unlocks it.
2. ENG. STOP control. When pulled
out, stops engine by cutting off fuel.
3. ACCESSORY power switch. When in
the ON position, routes power to the
starter system, instrument panel
gages, fuel pump and low pressure
warning buzzer.
4. Light switch. Turns truck lights
on or off.
4-2
5. Engine START button (on trucks
with LD 465-1 engines). When
pressed in, routes current to starter
to crank engine. On trucks with
LDS 427-2 engines the start button
is mounted on the cab floor. (Refer
to para 4-2c, Driver’s Compartment
Controls and Indicators.)
6. Air filter indicator. Shows red when
engine air filter needs cleaning.
7. Windshield wiper control knob. When
turned to on position, starts windshield wipers.
8. MANIFOLD HEATER SWITCH. When
set to ON position, starts manifold
h e a t e r . Manifold heater is used to
help start and warmup the engine
when outside temperature is below
+20°F .
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
a.
Instrument Panel Controls and indicators - Cont.
INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER
1.
FUEL level gage. Shows fuel level
in fuel tank.
2.
Speedometer/Odometer. Shows
speed and total mileage.
3.
T a c h o m e t e r . Shows engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). Shows 7.
engine operation time in hours and
tenths of hours.
4.
Water temperature gage. Shows
temperature of engine coolant.
Normal operating temperature is
between 180°F ancl 200” F.
5.
Battery generator indicator. Shows
when the battery is charging or
discharging.
6.
NOTE
A warning buzzer will be
heard when engine is started
and will stop when safe opcrating pressure is reached.
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE lever.
When in the IN position, starts front
wheel driving power.
8.
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE indicator
light. Goes on when front wheel
drive is operating.
9.
OIL pressure gage. Shows engine
oil pressure when engine is running.
10.
HIGH BEAM indicator. Goes on
when headlights are on high beam.
AIR pressure gage. Shows pressure
in the air reservoir tanks. Normal
pressure is 105 pounds per square
inch (psi).
4-3
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b . Windshield Controls and Indicators.
1.
Windshield locking handle. Locks
windshield in closed position.
2.
Windshield wiper lever. Gives a
way to move the windshield wiper
manually.
3.
Windshield clamping screws. Locks
wind shield in any open position.
.
4-4
4.
Windshield wiper motor reset
button. When in the out position,
wiper motor will not operate.
Press in before turning windshield
wiper control knob to on position.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Driver’s Compartment Controls and Indicators.
1.
Accelerator pedal. Controls engine 4.
speed.
2.
Dimmer switch. Raises or lowers
head light beam.
3.
Clutch pedal. Is pressed in before
shifting gears.
5.
Engine STAR T button (on trucks
with LDS 427-2 engines). When
pressed in, routes current to starter
to crank engine. (On trucks with
LD 465-1 engines the start button is
mounted on the instrument panel.
Refer to para 4-2a, Instrument Panel
Left Side Controls and Indicators.)
Service foot brake. When pressed
in, slows down and stops truck.
4-5
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Driver’s Compartment Controls and Indicators - Cont.
1.
Horn button. When pressed in,
sounds horn.
2.
Directional turn signal and flasher
control lever. Turns on turn signal
and emergency flasher lights.
4-6
3.
Steering wheel.
of the truck.
Controls direction
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Driver’s Compartment Controls and Indicators - Cont.
1.
Cowl ventilator. When open, lets
air flow into the driver’s compartment.
2.
Air supply valve. Is an emergency
source of compressed air for
inflating tires, cleaning air filters,
etc.
3.
FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift
lever. Used to place the transmission in one of five forward
positions, reverse or neutral.
4.
Spring tension control lever.
Turned to make seat harder or
softer.
4-7
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Driver’s Compartment Controls and Indicators - Cont.
1.
TRANSFER CASE shift lever.
Moved to (DOWN) LOW for heavy
load conditions and to (UP) HIGH for
light load conditions.
2.
Backrest control lever. Used to
change position of the lower section
of the backrest.
3.
Seat cushion control lever. Used to 9.
move rear portion of seat cushion up
or down.
Seat horizontal control lever. Used 10.
to move seat forward or backward.
Slotted bracket. Used to move front
of seat cushion up or down.
Locking bar. Locks power take-off
lever in off position when bar is
turned to up and down position.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Transfer POWER TAKE OFF LEVER.
Supplies power to operate auxiliary
equipment when in the up position.
8.
Handbrake control lever. Is pulled
up to set handbrake. The knob at
the top of the handle is turned to
set brake cable tension.
Shifting lever hinge lock. Locks
transmission power take-off lever
in neutral position.
POWER TAKE OFF SHIFTS LEVER.
Is moved forward to HIGH or LOW
position to give power to front winch
for reeling in a load. Moved to REV
(reverse) position to release or lower
a load.
~
‘fL.
TA 044947
4-8
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Front Winch Controls and Indicators.
1.
Front winch drum lock knob. Is
used to lock drum when winch is
not in use. When knob is pulled
out and up drum is unlocked.
2.
Front winch CLUTCH control lever.
Is moved to IN position (toward right
side of truck) to put winch into gear
and to OUT position (left side of
truck) to take it out of gear.
4-9
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Trailer Brake Controls and Indicators.
1.
Trailer air valve handles (two). Are
turned to send compressed air to
the trailer brake system.
NOTE
The trailer air valve handles are located on rear part of chassis
frame on right and left sides. Position of valve handle is
different on some trucks.
4-10
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-3. EQUIPMENT BODY CONTROLS AND INDICATORS.
a. Fuel Tank Trucks (M49A1C and M49A2C) Controls and Indicators.
M49A1C
7.
1.
Meter. Records amount (no. of
gallons) of fuel pumped out.
2.
Counter control lever. Is moved up
or down to return numbers on meter 8.
to zero.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Pressure gage. Shows condition of
filter elements by showing difference in pressure between inlet and
outlet side of filter.
9.
Pressure gage handle. Is turned to
No. 1 position (right) to take pressure 10.
readings on inlet side of valve. Is
turned to No. 3 position (left) to take
readings on outlet side of valve.
11.
Dump valve control (l-inch line). Is
turned left to open automatic dump
valve, which dumps water separated
from fuel by filter segregator unit.
Gravity delivery line gate valve. Is
turned left to let fuel flow through
gravity delivery line.
Pump delivery line gate valve. Is
turned left to let fuel flow through
pump and dispenser line.
Discharge valve control levers. Are
pulled back to open discharge valves
which control flow of fuel from tank
sections.
Liquid level gage. Is dipped into
tank sections to measure liquid
level.
Remote control handle. Is pulled
forward in an emergency to trip
operating levers and return them to
the closed position.
Manual drain valve control (l/2-inch
line). Is turned left to open manual
drain valve to drain sump assembly.
4-11
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
a.
Fuel Tank Trucks (M49A1C and M49A2C ) Controls and Indicators - Cent,
M49A2C
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4-12
Meter. Records amount (no. of
7.
gallons ) of fuel pumped out.
Counter control lever. Is moved up
or down to return numbers on meter 8.
to zero.
Pressure gage. Shows condition of
filter elements by showing difference 9.
in pressure between inlet and outlet
side of filter.
Pressure gage handle. Is turned to
No. 1 position (right) to take pressure 10.
readings on inlet side of valve. Is
turned to No. 2 position (left) to
11.
take readings on outlet side of valve.
Dump valve control (l-inch line). Is
turned left to open automatic dump
valve, which dumps water separated
from fuel by filter segregator unit.
Manual drain valve control (1/2 -inch
line). Is turned left to open manual
drain valve to drain the sump assembly.
Gravity delivery line gate valve. Is
turned left to let fuel flow through
gravity delivery line.
Pump delivery line gate valve. Is
turned left to let fuel flow through
pump and dispenser line.
Discharge valve control levers. Are
pulled back to open discharge valves
which control flow of fuel from tank
sections.
Liquid level gage. Is dipped into
tank sections to measure fuel level.
Remote control handle. Is pulled
forward in an emergency to trip
operating levers and return them
to closed position.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b.
Water Tank Trucks Controls and Indicators.
1.
Gravity delivery line suction valve. 3.
Is turned left to let water flow through
gravity delivery line.
2.
Pump delivery line discharge valve.
Is turned left to let water flow through
pump delivery line.
4.
400 gallon compartment valve lever
and 600 gallon compartment valve
lever. Are pulled back to open discharge valves which control flow of
water.
Water level gage. Is dipped into
tank sections to measure water level.
4-13
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b.
1.
4-14
Water Tank Trucks Controls and Indicators - Cont.
Exhaust bypass valve control. Is
pulled out to open exhaust bypass
valve and allow exhaust gases to
enter heating chamber under tank.
2.
Exhaust bypass fording valve. Is
closed to prevent outside water
from entering tank heating chamber
during fording operations.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Shop Van and Instrument Repair Shop Trucks Controls and Indicators,
1.
OPERATION BLACKOUT SWITCH
115V. -A. C. SYSTEM. Controls dome
lights in the 115 volt AC system.
2.
Circuit breaker box. Has four
circuit breakers which control van
body circuits.
3.
POWER SWITCH 115V. -A. C. Controls
all power to van body electrical circuits except the 24 volt AC-to-DC
converter for exhaust blower.
4.
EXH. BLOWER switch. Controls
power to exhaust blower.
5.
Converter SELECTOR switch. Is
used to choose desired voltage.
4-15
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Shop Van and Instrument Repair Shop Trucks Controls and Indicators - Cont.
1.
DOME LIGHT SWITCHES 24 VOLTS— 2. DOME LIGHTS SWITCHES 24 VOLTS
NORMAL-BLACKOUT switch. Lets
ON-OFF switch. Controls the
you control dome lights in normal
24-volt dome light system.
or blackout condition.
4-16
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Tractor Trucks Controls and Indicators.
1.
Airbrake hand control lever. Controls semitrailer airbrake system.
When lever is moved down, brakes
are on.
2.
Airbrake hose coupling shut-offcocks. Are turned on (up position)
to let air enter semitrailer brake
system after it is hooked up and
must be turned off (position shown)
before trailer is unhooked.
3.
Fifth wheel operating handle. Is
pulled forward to unlock jaws and
separate semitrailer from tractor.
4.
Safety latch. Makes sure that there
is a positive locking of the fifth
wheel jaws. The safety latch must
be moved left or right to move
operating handle.
4-17
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Dump Truck Controls and Indicators.
1.
Tailgate hand lever. Is pulled for- 3.
ward and down to open tailgate.
2.
Hydraulic hoist control lever. Is
moved forward to raise dump body,
and backward to lower dump body.
4-18
Safety lock. Locks control lever in
dump body down position when
turned to side position.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
f.
Pipeline Contruction Truck Controls and Indicators.
1.
Safety brake adjustment screw. Is 3.
turned right (from under the truck)
to tighten brake bands which prevent
lowering of the load when the clutch 4. .
is set free.
2.
Drum clutch lever. Is placed right
to make drum ready to turn and left
to set drum free.
Winch drumlock. Is pulled out and
turned 90° to unlock drum.
Drag brake adjustment screw. Is
turned right (from under the truck)
to increase drag and prevent free
spooling.
4-19
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
g.
Earth Boring Machine and Polesetter Truck Controls and Indicators.
1.
Rear winch control lever. Is moved
forward to operate rear winch, and
to the rear to stop rear winch.
2.
Hinge lock. Locks rear winch control lever in the off position when
not in use.
4-20
3.
Power divider control lever. Is
shifted as needed to give power to
rear winch or earth boring machine.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
g.
Earth Boring Machine and Polesetter Truck Controls and Indicators -Cont.
1.
OUTRIGGERS control valve levers.
Are moved forward (DOWN) to lower
outrigger legs and to the rear (UP)
to raise legs.
From operator’s position, right
lever controls left outrigger leg
and left lever controls right leg.
4-21
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
g.
Earth Boring Machine and Polesetter Truck Controls and Indicators - Cont.
1.
Leveling bubble. Shows that earth 4.
auger is in straight up and down
position when bubble is centered.
2.
Power-leveler shifting handle. Used
with boring machine feed and drive
control levers, to control up and
down and side to side movements of
earth boring machine and polesetter
derrick.
3.
4-22
Earth boring machine feed control
lever. Controls up and down movement of earth auger, when used together with the drive control lever.
5.
6.
Earth boring machine drive control
lever. Controls the turning of the
earth auger. Is used together with
the feed control lever.
Locking latch. Gives positive locking of drive and feed control levers
in braking position.
Outrigger safety latch. Gives
positive locking of outrigger leg
when in up position.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-4.
SPECIAL KITS CONTROLS AND INDICATORS.
a.
Hot Water Personnel Heater Kit Controls and Indicators.
1.
HEATER blower switch. Is placed
in HI or LO position to control flow
of forced air into personnel compartment.
2.
Damper control knob. Is pulled out
all the way to give maximum amount of
heat to personnel compartment.
3.
DEFROSTER knob. Is pulled out all
the way to send the flow of hot air
onto windshield to prevent frosting.
4.
Air bleeder valve. Is opened
(turned to left) while coolant is
flowing through the cooling system
to let air out and prevent an air
pocket from forming in heater hot
water tank.
4-23
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b.
Arctic Winterization Kit Controls and Indicators.
1.
HI-LO switch. Controls the rate of
6.
fuel burning and speed of blower in
personnel heater.
2.
Red indicator light. Is on when the
personnel heater is operating.
START-OFF-RUN switch. Is set
to START position to start personnel
heater. Set to RUN position to run
heater and to OFF to stop heater.
3.
4.
5.
4-24
Air control knob. Is pulled all the
way out to get maximum air flow,
is pushed in to lower or shut off
air flow.
DEFROSTER control knob. Is
pulled all the way out for maximum
defroster operation. Is pushed in
for maximum heater operation; is
placed half way out for combination
defroster heater operation.
EMERGENCY switch. Is for emergency conditions only. When switch
is placed in down position, fuel flow
to heater stops immediately and
blower motor is shut off.
7.
HI-LO switch. Controls rate of
fuel burning and speed of blower
in power plant (engine) heater.
8.
Red indicator light. Is on when
power plant heater is operating.
9.
START-OFF-RUN switch. Is set
to START position to start power
plant heater, to RUN position to
run heater and to OFF to stop
heater.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b.
Arctic Winterization Kit Controls and Indicators -Cont.
1.
Power plant heater shutoff cock.
Is opened (turned left) to let fuel
enter power plant heater combustion
chamber.
2.
Personnel heater shutoff cock. Is
opened (turned left) to let fuel enter
personnel heater combustion
chamber.
4-25
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b.
Arctic Winterization Kit Controls and Indicators -Cont.
1.
Inlet coolant shutoff cock. Is
opened (turned left) to let coolant
from power plant cooling system
enter heating chamber of power
plant heater.
4-26
2.
Outlet coolant shutoff cock. Is
opened (turned left) to let coolant
from heating chamber of power
plant heater enter power plant
cooling system.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Deep Water Fording Kit Controls and Indicators.
1.
Fording valve control. When placed
left (on later model trucks) or pulled
out (earlier model trucks), starts
the air pressure system and forces
air into flywheel housing to stop
water seepage when fording.
4-27
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Electric Brake Kit Controls and Indicators.
1.
Rheostat control handle. Is turned
right to increase electric brake
system braking action.
4-28
2.
Data plate. Shows number setting
of rheostat. The lighter the towed
load, the lower the number; the
heavier the towed load, the higher
the number.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section II. OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
SCOPE. This section describes general operating procedures which are the same
4-5.
for all trucks. Operating procedures that apply only to some models will follow under
separate paragraph headings. Each frame gives step-by-step instructions and detailed
illustrations to cover all operating controls and show how these controls are set for each
function.
4-6.
GENERAL OPERATING PROCEDURES.
WARNING
This vehicle has been designed to operate safely and efficiently within the limits specified in
this TM. Operation beyond these limits is
prohibited IAW AR 70-1 without written approval from the Commander, U.S. Army TankAutomotive Command, ATTN: AMSTA-CM-S,
Warren, MI 48397-5000.
NOTE
Before engine start up, be sure that you know where
all controls and indicators are, what the purpose of
each one is and what it does. (Refer to section I.)
Make sure that all preventive maintenance checks
and services (PMCS) were done. (Refer to PMCS,
volume 2, chapter 1. )
Change 2 4 - 2 9
TM 9-2320 -209-10-1
a.
Before Engine Startup.
FRAME 1
1.
Pull handbrake lever (1) up to position.
NOTE
The handbrake must click into place when handbrake lever (1)
is being pulled up. If you do not hear a click adjust handbrake
as given in steps 2 through 5.
2.
Push handbrake lever (1) forward to off position.
3.
If the handbrake is loose (not enough tension) turn knob (2) to the right one or two
turns. If the handbrake is tight (too much tension) turn knob (2) to the left one or
two turns.
4.
Pull handbrake lever (1) up again.
5.
If handbrake clicks into place it is properly adjusted. If click is not heard, do
steps 2, 3 and 4 again until handbrake clicks into place.
6.
If handbrake cannot be properly adjusted tell organizational maintenance.
7.
Set FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) to N position.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-30
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Place transmission power takeoff lever (l) to NEU position and lock it with hinge
lock (2).
GO TO FRAME 3
4-31
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Place TRANSFER CASE lever (1) in either:
(a) LOW (for greater power, lower speed) or
(b) HIGH (for greater speed, lower power).
GO TO FRAME 4
4-32
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
On trucks with a transfer power takeoff, place POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (1)
to DISENGAGE (off) position, toward front of truck, and turn lock (2) to lock
(up) position.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-33
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
On dump trucks, place hydraulic control lever(l) in the full up (body down)
position and set lock (2).
GO TO FRAME 6
4-34
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
On earth boring machines and polesetter trucks, place power-divider control lever
(1) in NEUTRAL position. Place rear winch control lever (2) in off (mid) position
and set hinge lock (3).
GO TO FRAME 7
4-35
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Check for hydrostatic lock as follows:
(a) Turn ACCESSORY switch (1) to ON.
(b) Pull ENG. STOP control knob (2) out as far as it will go and hold it out
to stop fuel flow.
(c) On trucks with engine START button (3) on instrument panel, press and
quickly let go of START button several times. On trucks with floor
mounted starter button (3) step on button and quickly let it go several
times.
2.
If any of the following happen, stop cranking immediately and tell
organizational maintenance:
(a) Engine starts to turn over with starter and stops.
(b) Starter sounds as if it is straining when cranking.
(c) Engine appears to be binding.
3.
4-36
If there is no sign of hydrostatic lock, let ENG. STOP control knob (2) return
to normal fuel on position.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b.
Starting the Engine Above + 20°F.
FRAME 1
1.
Step on clutch pedal (1) press it all the way down and hold it down.
CAUTION
Do not hold starter button in for more than 10 seconds
at one time. If engine does not start in 10 seconds,
wait two minutes before pressing starter button again.
Do not press starter button while headlights are on.
Either of the above may cause damage to battery,
starter or both.
1.
On trucks with engine START button (2) on instrument panel, press START
button and step down on accelerator pedal (3) until engine starts. On trucks
with floor mounted starter button (2) , step down on button and step down on
accelerator pedal (3) using same foot until engine starts.
2.
Let clutch pedal (1) up slowly as soon as engine starts.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-37
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
WARNING
Use hand THROTTLE (1) for cold engine starting and warm
up only. Never use it to drive truck.
1.
To warm up engine, pull hand THROTTLE (1) out until engine is running at
800 rpm as shown on tachometer (2).
GO TO FRAME 3
4-38
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
CAUTION
If OIL pressure gage (1) does not show correct pressure
within 20 seconds or if you notice any unusual noises or
vibrations, pull ENG. STOP control knob (2) out and hold
it out until engine stops to avoid serious engine damage.
1.
Check OIL pressure gage (1). It should show 30 to 40 psi. If it does not
show correct pressure, stop engine and tell organizational maintenance.
2.
Check battery generator indicator (3). Pointer should be in green area. If
it is not in green area, stop engine and tell organizational maintenance.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-39
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
WARNING
Trucks described in this manual are equipped with a low
air pressure buzzer system. Do not place vehicle in
motion until buzzer stops and AIR pressure gage (1) shows
at least 65 psi. Air brakes may not function properly when
air pressure is low.
1.
Check AIR pressure gage (1) . It should show 65 psi. If it does not show
between 65 and 120 psi, stop engine and tell organizational maintenance.
2.
Check air filter indicator (2) . It should not show red. If indicator shows
red, stop engine.
3.
Check temperature gage (3) . It should show between 180°F and 200°F when
engine is at normal operating temperature. If engine temperature rises
sharply to 21O°F or more, or if temperature stays below 160ºF, stop engine.
4-40
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Cold Weather Starting Below +20°F.
FRAME 1
1.
Step on clutch pedal (1) , press it all the way down, and hold it down.
2.
Pull hand THROTTLE (2) out half way.
3.
Step on the accelerator pedal (3). Press it down two-thirds of the way. On
trucks with floor mounted starter button (4) , using same foot, step down on
button. On trucks with START button (4) on instrument panel, press START
button.
4-41
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
CAUTION
Do not operate manifold heater unless engine is idling
or being cranked. Engine can be damaged.
1.
While engine is being cranked, turn MANIFOLD HEATER SWITCH (1) to ON.
The engine should start and run within 30 seconds.
2.
If engine does not start in 30 seconds, turn MANIFOLD HEATER SWITCH (1)
to OFF and stop cranking engine.
3.
Wait two minutes and do steps 1 and 2 again above.
NOTE
If engine misses or does not run smoothly after starting,
turn MANIFOLD HEATER SWITCH (1) ON for 30 seconds,
then OFF. Wait a few seconds and do it again until engine
runs smoothly.
4-42
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Placing and Keeping the Truck in Motion.
FRAME 1
1.
Make sure that front winch (1), auxiliary equipment, and tools are locked and stowed
for travel.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-43
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Set hand THROTTLE (1) in off position, all the way in.
2.
Set light switch (2) for lighting as needed. Refer to table 4-1 for switch
positions.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-44
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Table 4-1.
4-45
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
NOTE
If you are going to backup truck, get a second soldier to
use as a guide.
1.
Step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all the way down.
2.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) in position l or R, depending on
direction that you want to go.
NOTE
Position 1 (low gear) must always be used to place vehicle in
forward motion. Position R (reverse) is for backward motion.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-46
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
If truck is on level ground, set handbrake lever (l) free (down position).
2.
Let clutch pedal (2) come up slowly, while stepping down on accelerator pedal (3)
lightly.
3.
Keep pressing down on accelerator pedal (3) to move truck slowly and keep from
stalling.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-47
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
To go forward on upgrade terrain:
(a) Keep handbrake lever (l) up.
(b) Step on and press clutch pedal (2) all the way down.
(c) Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) in position 1.
(d) Let clutch pedal (2) upslowly until truck starts to move forward,
(e) Move handbrake lever (1) down to off position.
(f) Step down on accelerator pedal (4) slowly to increase speed.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-48
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
NOTE
When possible, use a second soldier as a guide when you are
backing up truck.
1.
To go backward on downgrade terrain:
(a)
Keep handbrake lever (1) in up (on) position.
(b)
Step on and press clutch pedal (2) all the way down.
(c)
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gear shift lever (3) in R position.
(d)
Let clutch pedal (2) up slowly until vehicle starts to move.
(e)
Move handbrake lever (1) to down (off) position.
(f)
Step down on accelerator pedal (4) slowly to increase speed.
GO TO FRAME 7
4-49
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
CAUTION
Shift to next highest gear position when truck has reached a
speed just below maximum shown on data plate for the position being used. Shifting too soon or too late causes extra
heavy wear on engine, transmission and other parts of the
truck.
1.
When truck speed shown on speedometer (1) is just below maximum speed shown
on data plate (2) for first gear, step on clutch pedal (3), press it all the way down.
2.
Let accelerator pedal (4) up.
3.
Move the FRONT TRANSMISSION gear shift lever (5) to position 2.
4.
Let clutch pedal (3) up slowly, press down on accelerator pedal (4), bring truck
to just below maximum speed for second gear.
5.
Repeat above procedure to shift to third, fourth, and fifth gear.
GO TO FRAME 8
4-50
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
1.
To shift from HIGH to LOW range when truck is heavily loaded or terrain is hilly,
soft or rough:
(a)
Reduce truck speed below speed shown on data plate (1) for FRONT
TRANSMISSION position in use.
(b)
Step on and press clutch pedal (2) down all the way.
(c)
Move TRANSFER CASE shift lever (3) down to LOW.
(d)
Let clutch (2) up slowly.
(e)
Step down on accelerator pedal (4) to bring truck to the speed you want.
GO TO FRAME 9
4-51
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
1.
To shift from LOW to HIGH range at any speed:
(a) Step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all the way down.
(b) Move TRANSFER CASE shift lever (2) up to HIGH range.
(c) Press down on accelerator (3) to increase speed of the engine to match the
truck speed.
(d) Let clutch pedal (1) come up slowly.
GO TO FRAME 10
4-52
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 10
CAUTION
Do not use engine alone without help of service brake to
slow down or stop truck. To do so would overspeed and
cause damage to the engine.
1.
To downshift, when truck is unable to maintain speed or for going down a steep
hill:
(a) Let accelerator pedal (1) up and quickly step down on clutch pedal (2).
(b) Let front transmission gears slow down.
(c) Step down on accelerator pedal (1) to speed engine up slightly (1,400 rpm to
1,800 rpm) as shown on tachometer (3).
(d) Move FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (4) to lower gear position.
(e) Let clutch pedal (2) up slowly.
NOTE
To prevent overheating brakeshoe linings when going down a
steep hill, press brake pedal (5) down, let it come up and
press down again. If it becomes necessary to double clutch
to shift gears, tell direct support maintenance unit.
GO TO FRAME 11
4-53
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 11
1.
Trucks covered in this manual should be operated within the following rpm
limits, as shown on tachometer (l):
(a) 1200.
Lowest engine rpm when operating under load.
(b) 1400-1800.
Engine rpm recommended for downshifting.
(c) 1400-2200.
Engine rpm recommended for cruising.
(d) 2600. Highest engine rpm recommended when pulling a very heavy load and
when going up a very steep hill.
4-54
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Stopping the Truck and Engine.
1.
To stop truck, take foot off accelerator pedal (1).
2.
Step on brake pedal (2) and press down evenly.
NOTE
Do not pump brake pedal (2) or shift FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) into N position. With
truck in gear, engine helps to slow truck speed.
3.
Slow truck until engine runs at idle speed (600 rpm) as shown on tachometer
(4).
4.
Step on clutch pedal (5) and press it all the way down.
5.
Move FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) to N.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-55
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
When truck has come to a complete stop, pull handbrake lever (l) up.
2.
Take your foot off brake pedal (2).
3.
Let clutch pedal (3) come up.
CAUTION
Do not let truck roll backward. This could cause strain
in the transfer unit which could make it hard to shift gears
in the front transmission.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-56
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
To stop engine, place ACCESSORY switch (1) and all other switches in off position.
WARNING
If engine does not stop after you have pulled the ENG. STOP
control knob out, leave the truck immediately and take cover
to avoid personal injury.
2.
Pull ENG. STOP control knob (2) out to cut off flow of fuel. Leave it in out Position.
3.
Do all after-operation preventive maintenance checks and services. (Refer to
vol 2, chapter 1 for procedures. )
4-57
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-7.
OPERATION OF FRONT WINCH.
a. General. Any of the 2 l/2-ton 6 x 6 trucks covered in this manual can be equipped
with a front winch. The front winch is mounted on the front of the truck on support brackets
attached to the left and right side rail extensions. Power for operation is supplied through
a propeller shaft extending from the transmission power takeoff. The transmission power
takeoff has high, low, and reverse gears, with neutral points between these positions. It
has an internal automatic safety brake to hold the winch load when the power takeoff is
being shifted.
b.
Before Operating.
FRAME 1
WARNING
Do not operate winch with a shear pin other than the
aluminum pin shown in the parts list for winch being
used. Always stand clear of the winch cable under load.
A snapped cable can cause serious injury.
1.
4-58
Check shear pin (1) and make sure that it is the aluminum pin called for in parts
list.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Unwinding the Winch Line.
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6 b.)
2.
Place truck so that front winch (1) is in a direct line with object (2) to be pulled.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-59
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Pull handbrake (1) up to on position.
2.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) in N position.
3.
Place POWER TAKEOFF SHIFTS lever (3) in NEU position.
4.
Place hinge lock (4) in lock position.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-60
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Move winch CLUTCH control lever (1) as far as it will go toward center of truck.
2.
Pull front winch drum lock knob (2) out, give it a quarter turn and let it go into
shallow slot on nut (3).
GO TO FRAME 4
4-61
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
WARNING
Always wear protective gloves when handling winch cable.
Do not let winch cable slip through hands. Rusty or broken
wires can cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not operate winch with less than four turns of cable on
drum.
NOTE
Do not kink winch cable.
1.
Pull end of winch cable (1) out to reach object to be pulled (2).
2.
Hook winch cable (1) to object to be pulled (2) and make it fast.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-62
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
For very heavy loads (1) always use a snatch block (2) as shown.
NOTE
The truck’s brakes will hold under a load only as much as
the shear pin will hold. Always use a snatch block for
very heavy loads. Never anchor the truck to a tree or
other object.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-63
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
4-64
To pull an object (1) that is not in a straight line (directional pull), use snatch
block (2) and utility chain (3), as shown.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Lifting or Pulling.
FRAME 1
WARNING
During all winch operations, the instant that slack in winch
line (1) is taken up is critical. Tell all personnel to stand
clear of winch line and load (2).
A snapped winch line or shifting load can be very dangerous.
If load shifts to present a hazard, stop pulling and spread
load. If any part of the equipment fails, stop operations
and tell organizational maintenance.
1.
Take up slack in winch line (1) by backing truck slowly, if there is room behind
truck and conditions permit.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-65
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
If conditions do not permit backing up truck, take up slack in cable with winch.
2.
Move CLUTCH control lever (1) as far as it will go toward right side of truck to
IN position to take up slack in cable.
NOTE
Never use winch CLUTCH control lever (1) to control winch.
Always use POWER TAKEOFF SHIFTS lever and engine clutch.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-66
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
F R A M E 4
1.
With engine running, leave FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (1) in position
N.
WARNING
Always use hand THROTTLE (2) to control engine speed
when operating winch. Avoid sudden changes in speed or
high speed. Do not run engine faster than 1,200 rpm as
shown on tachometer (3).
Rough, jerky operation may cause broken shear pins and
snapped cables, damage to vehicle or injury to personnel.
2.
Press down on clutch pedal (4).
3.
Lift POWER TAKEOFF SHIFTS lever hinge lock (5) and move POWER TAKEOFF
SHIFTS lever (6) to LOW for heavy loads, HI for normal loads. When in doubt,
use LOW position.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-67
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Let clutch pedal (1) come up slowly.
2.
Wind in winch cable to take up slack.
3.
Use hand THROTTLE (2) to control speed and continue smooth operation. Wind in
winch cable as needed to pull or lift load.
4-68
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Stopping the Winch.
FRAME
1
1.
Step on and press clutch pedal (1) all the way down.
2.
Place POWER TAKEOFF SHIFTS lever (2) in NEU position.
3.
Let clutch pedal (1) come up slowly.
4-69
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
f.
Lowering Load or Unwinding Slack Cable.
PERSONNEL: Two
FRAME
1
Soldier A
1.
Step on and press clutch pedal (1) all the way down.
2.
Check to be sure that FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2)
is in N position.
3.
Place POWER TAKEOFF SHIFTS lever (3) in REV position.
4.
Let clutch pedal (1) come up slowly.
5.
As winch begins to operate, control speed with hand THROTTLE
(4) to give smooth operation at moderate speed.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-70
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
CAUTION
Do not leave less than four turns of winch cable
(1) on winch drum (2) when lowering or unreeling
cable. The cable clamp alone will not hold against
a load.
FRAME 2
Soldier B 1.
Pull on winch cable hook (3) and unwind cable as needed.
NOTE
When unwinding winch cable (1) under power without a
load, keep tension on cable. This keeps cable from
crossing coils.
4-71
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
g.
Winding the Winch Line on the Drum.
FRAME 1
WARNING
Always wear protective gloves when handling winch cable.
Do not allow winch cable to run through hands. Rusty or
broken wires can cause serious injury.
1.
Attach a load to end of winch cable (1). If no load is available, attach the cable to a
tree or another truck with brakes set.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-72
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Step on and press clutch pedal (1) all the way down.
2.
Make sure that FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) is in N position.
3.
Place POWER TAKEOFF SHIFTS lever (3) in LOW position.
4.
Set handbrake lever (4) off to down position.
5.
Let clutch pedal (1) come up slowly.
and wind winch line onto drum.
6.
Step on brake pedal (5) and press down lightly to make sure of a tight, neat wind.
The front winch will pull vehicle forward
NOTE
Make sure that first layer of winch line goes onto drum
in order and that each additional layer starts back across
drum. If necessary, use wooden block to push or hammer
line closely wrapped. If truck is equipped with a load
winding device, this will not be necessary.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-73
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
When winch line is fully wound on drum, step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all
the way down.
2.
Place POWER TAKEOFF SHIFTS lever (2) in NEU position. Lock in position
with lock hinge (3).
3.
Pull handbrake lever (4) to up (on) position.
4.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
4-74
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
h. Locking the Front Winch for Travel.
FRAME 1
1.
Place cable chain (1) above bumper (2) and up through left shackle (3).
2.
Place cable chain (1) across front of bumper (2) and hook to right lifting
shackle (4).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-75
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Move winch CLUTCH control lever (1) toward left side (driver’s side) of vehicle, to
OUT position to set drum (2) free.
2.
Pull drum lock knob (3) out, turn a quarter-turn, (90°), and let wing on knob go
into deep slot on nut.
3.
Turn drum left until lock knob (3) plunger slips into nearest hole on drum
flange (4).
4-76
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-8.
OPERATION OF CARGO TRUCKS.
a.
General. The cargo trucks covered in this manual are equipped with a 12-foot steel
bed, removable front and side racks, and a hinged tailgate. They are designed to accept a
tarpaulin cover for cargo protection.
b.
Removing the Front and Side Racks.
FRAME 1
1.
Take hooks (1) out of retainer slots (2) on both sides of truck.
GO TO FRAME 2
_______
4-77
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Grasp top of tailgate (1) and pull it toward rear of truck.
2.
Let tailgate (1) come down slowly, do not let it drop.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-78
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Fold troop seat (1) up and lock it in place with retainers (2).
2.
Lift and take off front rack (3).
3.
Lift and take off side racks with seats (4).
4-79
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Installing the Front and Side Racks.
FRAME 1
1.
Put side racks with seats (1) into sockets (2) on right and left sides of truck.
2.
Put front rack (3) into front rack sockets (4).
3.
Make sure that retainers (5) on front rack go into retainer rings (6) on side rack.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-80
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Turn troop seat retainers (1) up.
2.
Move seats (2) down into position slowly. Do not let them drop.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-81
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Lift tailgate (1) up to closed position.
2.
Place hooks (2) through retainer slots (3).
4-82
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Removing the Front and Side Racks from Dropside Type Cargo Trucks.
PERSONNEL: Two
FRAME 1
1.
Turn left and loosen locking handles (1) on each side of tailgate.
2.
Turn handle locking pins (2), align pins with slots (3), pull handles through slots.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-83
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Move tailgate (1) down by gripping it on top and pulling toward rear. Let it come
down slowly, do not let it drop.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-84
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Pull side rack locking pin handles (l) from retainers (2).
2.
Move them away from rack sockets (3).
GO TO FRAME 4
4-85
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Fold the troop seats (1) up and lock them in place with retainers (2).
GO TO FRAME 5
4-86
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
Soldier A 1.
Lift front and side rack locking pins(l) out of retainer rings (2).
Soldiers
A and B
2.
Lift front rack (3) out of its sockets.
3.
Lift side rack (4) with seats out of its sockets.
4-87
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Lowering the Dropsides on Dropside Type Cargo Trucks.
TOOLS: Pliers
PERSONNEL: Two
FRAME 1
CAUTION
Use extreme care when moving drop sides down. Move them
down slowly. Do not let them fall free. Letting sides fall
can cause damage to side racks, mud guards, or both.
If truck is moved with sides in down position; be sure that
cargo is made fast. Clearance between sides and ground
when they are down with racks attached is 15 inches.
Without side racks attached, clearance is about 38 inches.
When sides are down, move truck slowly on even terrain
only.
1.
Turn left, loosen, locking handles (1) on each side of tailgate.
2.
Turn handle locking pins (2) to aline pins with slots (3), and pull handles through
slots .
GO TO FRAME 2
4-88
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Move tailgate (1) down by gripping it on top and pulling toward the rear. Move
down slowly, do not let tailgate drop.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-89
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
NOTE
Dropsides can be let down either with side racks in
position or after side racks have been taken off.
1.
Straighten open end of cotter pin (1) and take cotter pin out of hole in top
end of stabilizer (2).
2.
Take washer (3) off end of stabilizer (2).
3.
Take stabilizer (2) out of its mounting holes.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-90
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
Soldier A 1.
2.
To move dropsides down with side rack (1) in place, lift front and side
rack locking pins (2) out of retainer rings (3).
Hold side rack (l).
GO TO FRAME 5
4-91
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
Soldier B 1.
At front of truck, turn left, and loosen locking handle (1) on dropside (2) to be lowered.
2.
Turn locking handle ring (3) to aline pin (4) with slots (5), and pull
handle (1) from slots.
3.
Grip center of side (2) to be lowered firmly.
4.
Pull side (2) toward you and let it come down slowly. Do not let it drop.
Soldiers
A and B
4-92
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
f.
Removing the Dropsides, Tailgate or Both.
TOOLS: Pliers
PERSONNEL: TwO
(1) Preliminary procedure. Take off side racks. (Refer to para 4-8 d.)
(2) Removal.
FRAME 1
1.
Unlock tailgate (1) or dropside (2) to be taken off as in para 4-8 e.
2.
Use two soldiers to do this job. One soldier is needed to keep tailgate (1) or
dropside (2) steady while other takes cotter pins (3) and washers (4) off of hinge
pins (5).
GO TO FRAME 2
—————— ..—.
4-93
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Take hinge pins (1) out with fingers or pliers.
2.
Use one soldier at each end of tailgate or dropside to move tailgate or dropside
down from cargo bed.
4-94
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Installing the Dropside, Tailgate, Side Racks, and Front Racks.
g.
PERSONNEL: Two
FRAME 1
CAUTION
Sides of drop side cargo body are interchangeable. When
putting back sides, be sure that amber reflectors (1) are
at front of body and red reflectors (2) are at rear of body.
1.
Use two soldiers, one at each end of tailgate (3) or dropside (4) to lift them into
place and put hinge pins (5) back into hinge (6).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-95
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
2.
Put washers (1) and cotter pins (2) back onto hinge pin (3).
Spread open ends of cotter pin (2) to keep them from falling out.
3.
Lock both ends of tailgate (4) on side (5):
(a) Aline pins (6) with slots (7) and place pins in slots.
(b) Turn rings (8) 90°.
(c) Hold rings (8) and turn handles (9) right to tighten.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-96
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Put stabilizer rods (1) back in place.
2.
Put washer (2) back on upper end of stabilizer (1).
3.
Put cotter pin (3) into hole on upper end of stabilizer (1).
4.
Spread open end of cotter pin (3) to keep it from falling out.
Follow-on Maintenance Action Required:
Put back side racks. (Refer to para 4-8c. )
4-97
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-9.
OPERATION OF FUEL TANK TRUCKS.
General. M49A1C fuel trucks are equipped with a 200-gallon tank, a 400gallon center tank, and a 600-gallon rear tank.
M49A2C fuel trucks are equipped
with two 600-gallon tanks. Operating procedures described in this paragraph are
for both M49A1C and M49A2C fuel trucks. It should be noted that illustrations
given are for the M49A2C configuration. Certain procedures where discharge valve
control levers are operated will note two levers on M49A2C trucks and three levers
on M49A1C trucks.
b.
Gravity Filling the Fuel Tank Sections.
FRAME 1
WARNING
To prevent fire or explosion, smoking, flame, sparks,
and glowing or hot objects are not allowed near truck
during filling and delivery of fuel. Make sure that
rear and dispenser nozzle grounding wires are properly
connected for static discharge before transferring
of fuel.
NOTE
Drain compartments and piping system, including filter/
separator, when changing to a fuel or grade different
from the one last carried. Flush with 50 gallons of new
product, and circulate new product back to each compartment twice. Circulate new product through all fuel
handling components, including meter, filter/separator,
and hose reels when applicable. Get rid of this fuel
in the approved area after flushing.
1.
Start engine.
2.
Place truck near fuel supply with filler hole (1) in an easy to reach position.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-98
(Refer to para 4-6 b.)
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Pull handbrake lever (1) up to on position.
2.
Set ACCESSORY switch (2) and all other switches to off position.
3.
Pull ENG. STOP control knob (3) out to stop engine.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-99
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Open rear compartment door, pull ground wire (1) out and clip it to suitable
ground.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-100
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Place discharge valve control levers (1) in closed position (toward front of truck).
GO TO FRAME 5
4-101
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Turn delivery pump draincock (1) right, to closed position.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-102
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Turn meter drain knob (1) right, to closed position.
GO TO FRAME 7
4-103
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Turn pump delivery line gate valve knob (1) and gravity line gate valve knob (2)
right, to closed position.
GO TO FRAME 8
4-104
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
1.
Turn water segregator drain valve knob (1) and dump valve knob (2) right, to
closed position.
2.
Take fuel level gage (3) out of stowed position in compartment.
GO TO FRAME 9
4-105
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
1.
Takeoff filler cover (1) by turning it to the left.
2.
Take off padlock (2).
3.
Lift cover clamp (3) and open manhole cover (4).
GO TO FRAME 10
4-106
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 10
1.
Make sure dispenser nozzle (1) is properly grounded.
2.
Place dispenser nozzle (1) into filler hole (2).
3.
Press operating lever (3).
4.
Fill tank as needed.
Check level of tank using fuel level gage (4).
NOTE
Payload capacity of M49A1C trucks for off the road travel
is 200-gallons in center tank and 400-gallons in rear tank,
with forward tank empty. Payload capacity of M49A2C tank
truck for off the road travel is 600-gallons in rear tank
with forward tank empty.
GO TO FRAME 11
4-107
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 11
1.
Take filler nozzle (1) out of filler hole.
2.
Take filler nozzle ground clip (2) off grounding rail.
3.
Put filler hole cover (3) back on filler hole and tighten it.
4.
Close manhole cover (4) and lock it with cover clamp (5).
5.
Put on padlock (6).
GO TO FRAME 12
4-108
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 12
1.
Take ground wire clip (1) off ground and let ground wire rewind onto its reel (2).
2.
Put fuel level gage (3) back in its stowed position.
3.
Close and lock rear compartment door.
4-109
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Suction Filling the Tank Sections or Transferring Fuel from One Source to Another
c.
Through Pump.
TOOLS: 2-inch spanner wrench
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b. )
2.
Place truck near fuel supply with filler hole (1) in an easy to reach position.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-110
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Pull handbrake lever (1) to (up) on position.
2.
Set ACCESSORY switch (2) and all other switches to off position.
3.
Pull ENG. STOP control knob (3) out to stop engine.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-111
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Open rear compartment door, pull ground wire (1) out, and clip it to suitable ground.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-112
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Turn to left and take off gravity delivery line gate valve dust cap (1).
GO TO FRAME 5
4-113
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Open hose compartment doors (1), take out one or both lengths of hose (2) as needed
to reach fuel supply.
2.
Turn right and screw one end of hose (2) onto gravity delivery valve adapter (3),
Tighten with 2-inch spanner wrench.
3.
Put other end of hose (2) into fuel supply.
NOTE
Two lengths of hose can be joined together to form a longer
hose when needed.
4.
Take fuel gage (4) out of its stowed position.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-114
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Place discharge valve control levers (1) in closed position (toward front of truck).
GO TO FRAME 7
4-115
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Turn meter drain knob (1) right, to closed position.
GO TO FRAME 8
4-116
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
1.
Turn water segregator drain valve knob (1) and delivery pump drain cock (2)
right, to closed position.
GO TO FRAME 9
4-117
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
1.
Turn automatic dump valve knob (1), pump delivery line gate valve knob (2), and
gravity delivery line gate valve knob (3) left, to open position.
GO TO FRAME 10
4-118
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 10
(Refer to para 4-6 b.)
1.
Start engine.
2.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gear shift lever (1) in position 2.
3.
Place TRANSFER CASE shift lever (2) in the middle (neutral position).
GO TO FRAME 11
4-119
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 11
1.
Turn locking bar (1) to off (up) position.
2.
Move transfer POWER TAKE OFF LEVER (2) toward rear of truck to ENGAGE
(on) POSITION.
GO TO FRAME 12
4-120
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 12
1.
Slowly pull hand THROTTLE (1) out as far as it will go.
GO TO FRAME 13
4-121
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 13
1.
Unwind dispenser line and nozzle (1) from its mountings, on side of truck.
GO TO FRAME 14
4-122
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 14
WARNING
Do not remove any filler covers or manhole covers before
all grounding clips have been attached to prevent a static
spark from causing a fire or explosion.
1.
Clip dispenser nozzle ground wire (1) to tank rail (2).
2.
Unscrew and take off filler cover (3).
3.
Take off padlock (4).
4. Open manhole cover (5).
GO TO FRAME 15
4-123
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 15
1.
Put dispenser nozzle (1) into filler hole (2) of tank section to refilled.
2.
Press nozzle operating lever (3) to fill section of tank.
3.
Use fuel level gage (4) and fill tank to fill mark shown on gage for either the 200-,
400-, or 600-gallon tank.
GO TO FRAME 16
4-124
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 16
1.
After filling each section, close and make filler cover (1) and manhole cover (2)
fast.
2.
Put on padlock (3).
3.
Stow dispenser line (4) in traveling position on side of truck.
GO TO FRAME 17
4-125
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 17
1.
Turn gravity delivery line gate valve knob (1) and pump delivery line gate valve
knob (2) right to closed position.
GO TO FRAME 18
4-126
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 18
1.
Turn hand THROTTLE control knob (1) to unlock it and let it return to closed
position.
2.
Pull ENG. STOP control (2) out to stop engine.
GO TO FRAME 19
4-127
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 19
1.
Place transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (1) in off position, (toward front of truck).
2.
Turn locking bar (2) up to lock position.
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) in N position.
GO TO FRAME 20
4-128
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 20
CAUTION
Authorized procedures must be used to dispose of fuel drained
from hose lines.
1.
Turn hose coupling left and take hose section (1) off gravity delivery line gate
valve adapter (2).
2.
Put dust cover (3) back onto delivery line gate valve adapter (2).
3.
Drain and stow hose line (1).
4.
Close hose line compartment door (4).
GO TO FRAME 21
4-129
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 21
1.
Unclip ground wire (1) from ground connection and let wire rewind on its reel (2).
2.
Put fuel level gage (3) back in its stowed position.
3.
Close and make rear compartment door fast.
4-130
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Power Discharging the Tank Sections.
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Place truck in position to let discharge hose (1) reach filler hole of unit to be
serviced.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-131
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Pull handbrake lever (1) up to on position.
2.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) in position 2.
3.
Place TRANSFER CASE shift lever (3) in middle (neutral) position.
4.
Turn locking bar (4) to off (down) position.
5.
Move transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (5) to on (toward rear of truck) position.
6.
Slowly pull hand THROTTLE control knob (6) out all the way.
GO TO FRAME 3.
4-132
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Open rear compartment doors (1).
2.
Pull ground wire (2) out and clip it to a suitable ground.
3.
Pull other ground wire (3) out and clip it to unit to be filled.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-133
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Turn dump valve knob (1) left, to open position.
2.
Turn pump delivery line valve knob (2) left, to open position.
3.
Move discharge valve control lever for tank to be discharged to open position
(toward rear of truck). Lever (3) controls forward tank section. Lever (4)
controls rear tank section.
NOTE
On M49A1C truck lever (5) controls mid-section tank.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-134
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Unwind dispenser line and nozzle (1) from left side of truck.
2.
Clip dispenser nozzle grounding wire (2) to unit being serviced.
3.
Open filler cover (3), put nozzle (4) in, and fill as needed.
4.
After discharging fuel, unclip nozzle grounding wire (2).
5.
Put dispenser line and nozzle (1) in stowed position.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-135
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Turn pump delivery line gate valve knob (1) right to closed position.
2.
Turn dump valve knob (2) right to closed position.
GO TO FRAME 7
4-136
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
On M49A2C truck, move discharge valve control operating lever (1) or (2) (or on
M49A1C truck levers 1, 2, or 3) to closed position (toward front of truck).
2.
Unclip grounding wires (4) and (5); let them rewind on reel.
3.
Close and lock rear compartment doors (6).
GO TO FRAME 8
4-137
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
1.
Turn hand THROTTLE control knob (1) until it unlocks and let it return to closed
position.
2.
Place ACCESSORY switch (2) and all other switches in off position.
3.
Pull ENG. STOP control (3) out to cut off fuel flow. Leave it in out position.
4.
Place transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (4) in off position (toward front of
truck. )
5.
Turn locking bar (5) to lock (up) position.
6.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (6) in N position.
4-138
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e . Checking Condition of Filter.
during pumping operation.
Filter should be checked as follows once a day
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b. )
2.
Transfer power to the pump.
3.
Open rear compartment doors and hook up ground wires. (Refer to para 4-9d, frame
3 for procedures).
4.
Take a pressure reading on inlet side of filter.
(Refer to para 4-9d, frame 2 for procedures).
(a) Turn pressure gage control handle (1) right, to position NO. 1.
(b) Write reading down.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-139
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Take a pressure reading on outlet side of filter.
(a) Turn pressure gage control handle (1) right, to position NO. 2.
(b) Write reading down.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-140
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Take a pressure reading on internal pressure side of valve.
(a) Turn pressure gage control handle (1) right, to position NO. 3.
(b) Write reading down.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-141
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Close valve by turning pressure gage control handle (1) left and placing pointer
between position NO. 1 and position NO. 2.
2.
Tell organizational maintenance if any of following conditions exist:
(a) Difference between readings taken in position NO. 1 (inlet pressure) and
position NO. 2 (outlet pressure) is more than 20 psi.
(b) Difference between readings taken in position NO. 1 (inlet pressure) and
position NO. 3 (internal pressure) is more than 15 psi.
(c) Difference between readings taken in position NO. 2 (outlet pressure) , and
position NO. 3 (internal pressure) is more than 15 psi.
3.
Take off ground wires and close rear compartment doors. (Refer to para 4-9d
frame 7).
4.
Take off power to pump. (Refer to para 4-9d, frame 8).
4-142
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
f.
Gravity Discharging the Tank Sections.
TOOLS: 2-inch spanner wrench
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b. )
2.
Place truck in position, with rear compartment (1) near unit to be serviced (2).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-143
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
.
FRAME 2
1.
Pull handbrake lever (1) up to on position.
2.
Set ACCESSORY switch (2) and all other switches to off position.
3.
Pull ENG. STOP control knob (3) out to stop engine.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-144
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 1
1.
Open rear compartment doors (1).
2.
Pull ground wire (2) out and clip it to a suitable ground.
3.
Pull other ground wire (3) out and clip it to unit to be filled.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-145
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Turn left and take gravity delivery line gate valve, dust cover (1) off.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-146
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME
5
1.
Open hose compartment doors (1), take out one or both lengths of hose (2), as
needed, to reach tank to be filled.
2.
Turn right and screw one end of hose onto gravity delivery valve adapter (3).
Tighten with 2-inch spanner wrench.
3.
Take dispenser nozzle (4) from rear compartment, put it onto other end of hose (2).
4.
Turn right to tighten.
tightening.
After it is hand tight, use spanner wrench to complete
NOTE
Two lengths of hose can be joined together to form a
longer hose when needed.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-147
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Turn left and open gravity delivery line gate valve (1).
2.
Move discharge valve control lever for tank to be discharged to open position
(toward rear of truck).
(a) Lever (2) on left controls forward tank.
(b) Lever (3) on right controls rear tank.
3.
Open filler cover (4) on tank to be filled.
4.
Place dispenser nozzle (5) into tank.
5.
Press operating lever (6) to let fuel flow into tank.
GO TO FRAME 7
4-148
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
When needed amount of fuel has been put into tank, set operating lever (1) free.
2.
Move discharge valve control levers (2) and (3) to closed position (toward front
of truck).
3.
Turn gravity delivery line gate valve knob (4) right, to closed position.
4,
Take dispenser nozzle (5) out of tank.
5.
Put filler cover (6) onto filler hole, turn right to tighten.
GO TO FRAME 8
4-149
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
1.
Loosen nozzle (1) using spanner wrench, take it off end of hose (2), and return it to
place in rear compartment.
2.
Loosen hose (2) using spanner wrench.
3.
Drain hose using authorized procedures, and return it to hose compartment.
4.
Put dust cover (4) back onto valve adapter (3).
5.
Unclip grounding wires (5) and (6) from tank and ground, let them rewind on reel.
6.
Close rear compartment doors (7).
4-150
Take it off gravity valve adapter (3).
Turn clockwise (right) to tighten.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
g. Fording
TOOLS: Ratchet wrench
1/2-inch straight bar plug wrench
SUPPLIES: Container, suitable for fuel
FRAME
7
1.
Open rear compartment doors (1).
2.
Make sure that dust cover (2) is in place and made fast.
3.
Refer to para 4-18 and 4-25 for complete fording procedures.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-151
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME
2
WARNING
To prevent fire or explosion, smoking, sparks, or open
flame are not allowed within 50 feet of working area
during this operation.
1.
After fording, park truck and stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6 e.)
2.
Clip truck ground wire (1) to container (2).
3.
Check to make sure that there is no water in delivery lines (3). Let fuel and/or
water drain into container.
4.
If necessary drain segregator (4), meter (5), delivery pump (6), and manifold
pipes (7).
GO TO FRAME 3
4-152
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
2.
To drain segregator (1):
(a)
Place container (2) under truck and under water separator drain pipe (3)
and automatic dump pipe (4).
(b)
Turn both water separator drain valve (5) and automatic dump valve (6)
left to open position.
(c)
After fuel and/or water has drained into container (2), turn water
separator drain valve (5) and automatic dump valve (6) right to closed
position.
To drain meter (7):
(a)
Place container (2) under truck and under meter drain pipe (8).
(b)
Turn knob of meter drain valve (9) left to open position.
(c)
After fuel and/or water has drained out, turn knob of meter drain valve (9)
to right to closed position.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-153
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
To drain delivery pump (1):
(a)
Place container (2) under truck, and under delivery pump (1).
(b)
For M49A2C trucks turn drain valve (3) left to open position.
(c)
For M49A1C trucks, using ratchet wrench and straight bar plug wrench, turn
plug (4) left to loosen and take it out.
(d)
Turn pump delivery line gate valve (5) left to open position.
(e)
Let fuel and/or water drain into container.
(f)
For M49A2C trucks, turn drain valve (3) right to closed position.
(g)
For M49A1C trucks, using ratchet wrench and straight bar plug wrench,
screw drain plug (4) back into delivery pump (1).
(h)
Turn pump delivery line gate valve (5) right to closed position.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-154
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
To drain manifold pipes (1):
(a)
Place delivery line (2) on gravity delivery line gate valve (3). (Refer to
para 4-9 f. )
(b)
Check that discharge valve control levers (4) are in closed (forward)
position.
(c)
Turn left and open gravity delivery line gate valve (3).
(d)
Let water and fuel drain from manifold pipes (1) into container (5).
(e)
Turn right and close gravity delivery line gate valve (3).
(f)
Take delivery line (2) from gravity delivery line gate valve (3). (Refer to
para 4-9 f.)
(g)
(h)
Unclip ground wire (6) and let it rewind on reel.
Close rear compartment doors (7).
CAUTION
Authorized procedures must be used to get rid of the fuel
drained into the container.
4-155
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-10. OPERATION OF WATER TANK TRUCKS.
a.
General. Water tank trucks covered in this manual are equipped with a 400-gallon
front tank and a 600-gallon rear tank for a total payload capacity of 1,000 gallons when
operating on smooth roads. Payload capacity for off-the-road travel is 400-gallons in
rear compartment.
CAUTION
Sanitary precautions must be observed at all times,
when handling water and equipment, to keep water
clean.
At freezing temperatures, delivery pump must be
run 60 seconds, with delivery line gate valves open,
to drain manifold pipes and delivery pump dry. Water
in system could freeze up and cause damage to components.
4-156
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b.
Gravity Filling the Tank Sections.
TOOLS: Stick gages
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b. )
2.
Place truck near filling device or filling hose.
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever in N position.
4.
Put handbrake lever in on (up) position.
5.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
6.
Take off padlock (1), lift cover clamp (2) and open cover (3).
7.
Open rear compartment doors (4).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-157
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Turn right and close pump delivery line discharge valve (1) and gravity delivery
line suction valve (2).
2.
Make sure that 400 gallon compartment valve and 600 gallon compartment valve
levers (3) are in closed position (toward front of truck).
GO TO FRAME 3
4-158
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
Press operating lever (2) to let water into tank
1.
Place nozzle (1) into filler hole.
section.
2.
Take water level gages (3) and (4) out of rear compartment.
3.
Check water level using gage (3) for rear section and gage (4) for front section.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-159
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
After filling each section as needed, close filler cover (1). Lock it with cover
clamp (2). Put on padlock (3).
2.
Put water lever gages (4 and 5) back in rear compartment.
3.
Close rear compartment doors (6).
4-160
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Suction Filling the Tank Sections and Transferring Water from One Location to Another.
TOOLS: 1 1/2-inch spanner wrench
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Place truck near water source.
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever in position N.
4.
Pull handbrake lever to on (up) position.
5.
Open rear compartment doors (1).
6.
Turn left and take gravity delivery line suction valve dust cover (2) and pump
delivery line discharge valve dust cover (3) off.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-161
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME
2
1.
Take suction hose (1) out of rear compartment (2).
2.
Put one end of hose onto gravity delivery line suction valve (3). Using spanner
wrench, turn hose (1) to right to tighten.
3.
Take strainer (4) from rear compartment, put it onto other end of hose (1), Using
spanner wrench, turn strainer to right to tighten.
4.
Place strainer end of hose (1) into water source.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-162
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Take 1 1/2 x 2-inch reducer coupling (1) from rear compartment (2).
2.
Put coupling (1) onto pump delivery line discharge valve adapter (3).
3.
Using spanner wrench, turn coupling (1) to right to tighten.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-163
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME
4
1.
Take discharge hose (1) from left side of rear compartment (2).
2.
Put one end of hose onto reducer coupling (3).
3.
Using spanner wrench, turn reducer coupling (3) to right to tighten.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-164
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Take discharge nozzle (1) from rear compartment (2), place it onto end of discharge hose (3).
2.
Using spanner wrench, turn discharge nozzle (1) to right to tighten.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-165
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Turn gravity delivery line suction valve knob (1) and pump delivery line discharge
valve knob (2) left, to open position.
2.
Make sure that 400 gallon and 600 gallon compartment valve levers (3) are in
closed position (toward front of truck).
GO TO FRAME 7
4-166
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Press clutch pedal (1) all the way down.
2.
Place TRANSFER CASE shift lever (2) in middle (neutral) position.
3.
Turn locking bar (3) down and move transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (4) to
ENGAGE (on) POSITION (toward rear of truck).
4.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (5) in position 2, and let clutch
pedal (1) up slowly.
5.
Pull hand THROTTLE (6) out all the way slowly.
GO TO FRAME 8 to suction fill tanks.
GO TO FRAME 10 to transfer water from one place to another.
4-167
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
1.
To suction fill tank sections:
(a)
Take off padlock (1), lift cover clamp (2), and open filler cover (3) of tank
section to be filled.
(b)
Place nozzle (4) into filler hole, press operating lever (5), and fill tank
with amount of water required.
(c)
Use water level gage (6) (in rear compartment) to measure amount of water
in rear section or water level gage (7) to measure amount of water in front
section of tank.
(d)
Refer to para 4-10a for payload capacity.
GO TO FRAME 9
4-168
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
1.
After filling, take dispenser nozzle (1) out of filler hole and suction hose with
strainer end (2) out of water source.
2.
Close filler cover (3) and lock with cover clamp (4). Put on padlock (5).
3.
Turn pump delivery line discharge valve knob (6) and gravity delivery line suction
valve knob (7) right, to closed position.
TO TRANSFER WATER, IF NEEDED, GO TO FRAME 10
IF WATER TRANSFER IS NOT NEEDED GO TO FRAME 11
4-169
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 10
1.
To transfer water from one location to another:
(a)
Place strainer end of suction hose (1) into source of water.
(b)
Place dispenser nozzle (2) into water container (3) to be filled.
(c)
Press dispenser handle operating lever (4) to let water flow.
(d)
When water container (3) is full, take dispenser nozzle (2) out of container
(3), and strainer end of suction hose (1) out of water source. Cover
containers.
GO TO FRAME 11
4-170
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 11
1.
After filling tank sections or transferring water:
(a)
Turn hand THROTTLE knob (1) and let it go back to closed position.
(b)
Press clutch pedal (2) all the way down.
(c)
Move transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (3) forward to DISENGAGE (off)
POSITION.
(d)
Turn locking bar (4) up to lock position.
(e)
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (5) in N position and let
clutch pedal (2) up slowly.
(f)
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
GO TO FRAME 12
4-171
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 12
1.
Using spanner wrench, turn left and separate discharge nozzle (1) from end of
hose (2).
2.
Using spanner wrench, turn left and separate strainer (3) from end of hose (4).
3.
Put strainer (3) and nozzle (1) back into place in rear compartment (5).
GO TO FRAME 13
4-172
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 13
1.
Using spanner wrench, turn left and separate hose (1) from gravity delivery line
suction valve (2).
2.
Using spanner wrench, turn left, and take discharge hose (3) from pump delivery
line discharge valve (4).
3.
Drain hoses and return to place in rear compartment (5).
GO TO FRAME 14
4-173
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 14
1.
Using spanner wrench, turn left and take coupling (1) from pump delivery line
discharge valve (2).
2.
Put coupling (1) back into place in rear compartment (3).
3.
Put dust covers (4) onto pump delivery line discharge valve adapter (2) and gravity
delivery line suction valve adapter (5). Turn right to tighten.
4.
Close rear compartment doors (6).
4-174
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Hydrant Filling the Tank Sections.
TOOLS: Hydrant wrench
2-inch spanner wrench
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Place truck near hydrant.
3.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
4.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever in N position.
5.
Put handbrake lever up (on) position.
6.
Take off padlock (1), lift cover clamp (2), and open cover (3).
7.
Open rear compartment doors (4).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-175
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Take hydrant wrench (1) from rear compartment.
2.
Place wrench on hydrant cap (2), turn wrench to left, and take cap off,
GO TO FRAME 3
4-176
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Take 2 1/2 x 1 1/2-inch reducer coupling (1) from rear compartment.
2.
Put reducer coupling onto hydrant threads, turn right, and tighten with 2-inch
spanner wrench.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-177
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Take discharge hose (1) from rear compartment.
2.
Put one end of hose onto coupling (2), turn right, and use spanner wrench to
tighten.
3.
Take discharge nozzle (3) from rear compartment, put it onto other end of hose (1),
turn right, and use spanner wrench to tighten.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-178
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Make sure that 400 gallon and 600 gallon compartment valve levers (1) are in
closed position (toward front of truck).
2.
Make sure that pump delivery line discharge and gravity delivery line suction
valves (2) are in closed position (turn knob right to close).
GO TO FRAME 6
4-179
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Place hydrant wrench (1) on hydrant valve (2) and turn in direction of arrows to
open.
GO TO FRAME 7
4-180
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Put nozzle (1) into tank section to refilled.
2.
Press operating lever (2) to let water flow into tank.
3.
Check water level in tank with water level gages (3 and 4) found in rear
compartment. Use gage (3) for front tank, and gage (4) for rear tank.
4.
Refer to para 4-10a for payload data.
GO TO FRAME 8
4-181
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
1.
After filling tank section, take dispenser nozzle (1) out of tank.
2.
Close filler cover (2) and lock with clamp (3). Put on padlock (4).
GO TO FRAME 9
4-182
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
1.
Place hydrant wrench (1) on hydrant valve (2) and turn in direction of arrows to
close valve.
GO TO FRAME 10
4-183
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME
10
1.
Press nozzle operating lever (1) to relieve pressure.
2.
Using spanner wrench, loosen and then separate the following:
(a) Nozzle (2) from hose (3).
(b) Hose (3) from reducer coupling (4).
(c) Reducer coupling (4) from hydrant (5).
3.
Put hydrant cap (6) back onto hydrant (5). Using hydrant wrench, turn cap to right
to tighten.
GO TO FRAME 11
4-184
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 11
1.
Drain discharge hose (1).
2.
Stow all equipment in proper place in rear compartment (2).
3.
Close rear compartment doors (3).
4-185
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Power Discharging the Tank Sections.
TOOLS: 2-inch spanner wrench
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Park truck near area where water is to be let out.
3.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
4.
Open rear compartment doors (1). Turn dust cover (2) left and take it off pump
delivery line discharge valve adapter (3).
5.
Put 1 1/2 x 2-inch reducer coupling (4) onto pump delivery line discharge valve
adapter (3), turn right, and use spanner wrench to tighten.
6.
Place one end of discharge hose (5) onto coupling (4), turn right, and use spanner
wrench to tighten.
7.
Place discharge nozzle (6) onto other end of hose (5), turn right, and use spanner
wrench to tighten.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-186
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Place TRANSFER CASE shift lever (1) in neutral position.
3.
Turn locking bar (2) down and place transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (3) in
ENGAGE (on) POSITION (toward rear of truck).
4.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (4) in position 2.
5.
Pull hand THROTTLE (5) out as far as it will go.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-187
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Place either 400 gallon front tank compartment valve lever (1) or 600 gallon rear
tank compartment valve lever (2) in open position (toward rear of truck).
CAUTION
Always empty front tank compartment first when discharging
water on any kind of terrain or road conditions. This will
keep load properly distributed (even) for vehicle operation.
2.
Turn pump delivery line discharge valve knob (3) left, to open position.
3.
Press nozzle operating lever (4) and let water come out as needed.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-188
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
After letting out water, turn pump delivery line discharge valve knob (1) right to
closed position.
2.
Place 400 gallon compartment valve lever and 600 gallon compartment valve
lever (2) in closed position (toward front of truck).
GO TO FRAME 5
4-189
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Turn hand THROTTLE (1) and let it go back to closed position.
2.
Pull ENG. STOP control (2) out to stop engine.
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) in N position.
4.
Place transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (4) in DISENGAGE (off) POSITION,
(toward front of truck).
5.
Turn locking bar (5) up (locked position).
GO TO FRAME 6
4-190
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Press discharge nozzle operating lever (1) to ease off pressure.
2.
Use spanner wrench, turn left, loosen and separate the following:
(a)
Nozzle (2) from hose (3).
(b)
Hose (3) from reducer coupling (4).
(c)
Reducer coupling (4) from pump delivery line discharge valve adapter (5).
3.
Put dust cover (6) onto pump delivery line discharge valve adapter (5). Turn
right to tighten.
4.
Stow all equipment in place in rear compartment. Close compartment doors (7).
4-191
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
f.
Gravity Discharging the Tank Sections.
TOOLS: 2-inch spanner wrench
FRAME
1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Park truck near area where water is to be let out.
3.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
4.
Open rear compartment doors. Turn left, and take dust cover (1) off gravity
delivery line suction valve adapter (2).
5.
Put 1 1/2 x 2-inch reducer coupling (3) onto gravity delivery line suction valve
adapter (2), turn right, and use 2-inch spanner wrench to tighten.
6.
Place one end of discharge hose (4) onto coupling (3), turn right, and use spanner
wrench to tighten.
7.
Place discharge nozzle (5) onto other end of hose, and turn to right to tighten.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-192
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Turn gravity delivery line suction valve knob (1) left, to open position.
2.
Place either 400 gallon compartment valve lever or 600 gallon compartment valve
lever (2) in open position, (left lever controls 400 gallon front tank, right lever
controls 600 gallon rear tank).
CAUTION
Always empty front tank compartment first when
letting out water, on any kind of terrain or road condition.
This will keep the load properly distributed (even) for
vehicle operation.
3.
Press discharge nozzle operating lever (3) to let water flow as needed.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-193
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
When needed amount of water has been discharged, place 400 gallon compartment
valve lever and 600 gallon compartment valve lever (1) in closed position (toward
front of truck).
2.
Turn gravity delivery line suction valve (2) right, to closed position.
3.
Press dispenser nozzle operating lever (3) to let water out of hose.
4.
Using a spanner wrench, turn left, loosen and then separate the following:
(a) Discharge nozzle (4) from hose (5).
(b) Hose (5) from reducer coupling (6).
(c) Coupling (6) from gravity delivery line suction valve adapter (7).
5.
Put dust cover (8) onto gravity delivery line suction valve adapter (7) and turn
right to tighten.
6.
Drain hose (5).
7.
Stow all equipment in proper places in rear compartment.
4-194
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
g.
Operating Water Tank Trucks During Freezing Temperatures.
FRAME 1
CAUTION
Do not heat water tank with less than 10 inches of
water in both front and rear tank sections. The
10 inches of water prevents heat from building
up in parts of the tank. Metal expansion due to
the heat could cause cracks in seams and welds.
1.
Take off padlocks (1) open tank section filler covers (2).
2.
Measure water level in each tank section using water level gage (3) for front
section and water level gage (4) for rear section.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-195
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
If there is less than 10 inches of water in either section, add water following
procedures given in para 4-10b, c, d, or move water from one section to another.
2.
To move water from one tank section to another, turn pump delivery line discharge
valve (1) and gravity delivery line suction valve (2) knobs right to closed position.
3.
Move 400 gallon and 600 gallon compartment valve levers (3) to open position
(toward rear of truck).
4.
When low tank section reaches a minimum 10-inch water level, move 400 gallon
and 600 gallon compartment valve levers (3) to closed position.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-196
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
CAUTION
During freezing temperatures, always keep delivery
lines, compartment drain pipes, manifold pipes and
delivery pump free of water except during water discharging operations. Water in system could freeze
and cause damage to components.
1.
Turn left and take dust covers (1) off.
2.
Turn pump delivery line discharge valve knob (2) and gravity delivery line suction
valve knob (3) left, to open position.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-197
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME
1.
2.
4
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
Press down on clutch pedal (1) and place TRANSFER CASE shift lever (2) in
neutral position.
3.
Turn locking bar (3) down and pull transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (4) to ENGAGE
(on) POSITION (toward rear of truck).
4.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (5) in position 2.
5.
Let clutch pedal (1) come up slowly.
6.
Set hand THROTTLE (6) to run engine at 1,000 rpm.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-198
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Let pump run for 60 seconds to drain delivery lines, compartment drain pipes,
manifold pipes and delivery pump.
2.
Turn hand THROTTLE (1) and let it go all the way in.
3.
Press clutch pedal (2) all the way down.
4.
Move transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (3) forward to DISENGAGE (off) POSITION
and lock with locking bar (4).
5.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (5) in N position.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-199
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Make sure that exhaust bypass fording valve (1) is in open position (in direction of
arrow).
GO TO FRAME 7
4-200
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Pull exhaust bypass fording valve control (1) out, turn it to side-to-side position.
This will lock control and keep valve open.
2.
When outside temperature goes above freezing (32 ° F), turn bypass fording valve
control (1) to up and down position. Let it go back to close valve and stop heating.
3.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
4-201
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-11. OPERATION OF SHOP VAN AND INSTRUMENT REPAIR SHOP VAN TRUCKS.
a.
Preparing Shop Van and Instrument Repair Shop Van for Use.
FRAME
1.
1
Place access ladder (1) into position.
(a) Unsnap ladder lock (2).
(b) Take ladder out of its storage sockets (3).
(c) Place top end of ladder into mounting brackets (4) and place bottom end firmly
on the ground.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-202
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Open right rear door (1).
(a) Unlock and take padlock (2) off.
(b) Turn door handle (3) to side-to-side position.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-203
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME
1.
3
Open left rear door (1) front inside of van.
(a) Pull down on upper latch rod ring (2) and lift up on lower latch (3).
(b) Press each door against door retainer (4) to keep door in open position.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-204
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Open blackout panels (1),
(a) Lift latch (2).
(b) Slide panels (1) down.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-205
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME
5
1.
Open side window (1) from inside with blackout panels in fully open or fully closed
position.
2.
Press sliding member (2) and lift ring (3) from retainer (4).
GO TO FRAME 6
4-206
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Lower sliding member (1), push it outward to open window while pulling down on
window latch ring (2).
2.
Let window latch ring (2) go, continue to push outward until latch pin snaps into
hole in sliding member (1), to hold window open.
GO TO FRAME 7
4-207
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Close side window (1) by holding sliding member (2) and pulling window latch
ring (3). Let window come back to closed position and let ring go,
2.
Lift sliding member (2), and fold it flat against window frame (4).
3.
Lift ring (5) and slip it over retainer (6).
4-208
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b.
Supplying 115-Volt AC Power to Shop Van.
FRAME 1
1.
Inside van, check that power switch (1) is in off (down) position.
2.
Turn dust cover (2) to left and take it off.
3.
Plug cable connector (3) from outside 115-volt ac power source into receptacle (4)
on front of van.
4.
When van is to be moved to another location, take cable connector (3) out of
receptacle (4). Put on dust cover (2).
4-209
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Operating the Exhaust Blower.
(1) Operating from 24-volt source
FRAME 1
1.
Place POWER SWITCH 115-VAC (1) handle in OFF (down) position.
2.
Place converter SELECTOR switch (2) in 24V position.
3.
Place EXH BLOWER switch (3) in desired HI or LOW speed position.
4-210
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(2)
Operating from 115-volt source.
FRAME 2
1.
Place POWER SWITCH 115-VAC handle (1) in ON (up) position.
2.
Place NO. 3 CIRCUIT BREAKER HEATER CIRCUIT (2) in ON position.
3.
Place converter SELECTOR switch (3) in 115V position. Red light (4) will
light.
4.
Place EXH BLOWER switch (5) in desired HI or LO speed position.
4-211
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Operating the Dome and Blackout Dome Lights.
(1) Operating 115-volt dome lights under normal conditions.
FRAME 1
1.
Place POWER SWITCH 115-VAC handle (1) in ON (up) position.
2.
Place NO. 4 CIRCUIT BREAKER CEILING LAMP CIRCUIT (2) in ON position.
3.
Place OPERATION BLACKOUT SWITCH 115-VAC SYSTEM (3) in down position.
4-212
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(2)
conditions.
Operating 115-volt dome and blackout lights under blackout
FRAME 1
1.
Place POWER SWITCH 115-VAC handle (1) in ON (up) position.
2.
Place NO. 4 circuit breaker CEILING LAMP CIRCUIT (2) in ON position.
Place OPERATION BLACKOUT SWITCH 115-VAC SYSTEM (3) in up (on)
position.
3.
4-213
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(3)
Operating 24-volt dome light under normal conditions.
FRAME 1
1.
Place POWER SWITCH 115-VAC handle (1) in OFF (down) position.
2.
Place BLACKOUT dome light toggle switch (2) in ON position.
3.
Place dome light toggle switch (3) in NORMAL position.
4-214
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(4) Operating 24-volt dome lights under blackout conditions.
FRAME 1
1.
Place POWER SWITCH 115-VAC handle (1) in ON (up) position.
2.
3.
Place dome light toggle switch (2) in ON position.
Place OPERATION BLACKOUT SWITCH 115-VAC SYSTEM (3) in (up) ON
position.
4.
Place dome light toggle switch (4) in BLACKOUT position.
5.
Open and close rear door to check blackout action.
4-215
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Supplying Power to Moulding Receptacles.
FRAME 1
1.
Place POWER SWITCH 115-VAC handle (1) in ON (up) position.
2.
To supply power to moulding receptacles (2), on right side of shop van, set NO. 1
CIRCUIT BREAKER R. H. POWER CIRCUIT (3) to ON position.
3.
To supply power to moulding receptacles (4), on left side of shop van, set NO. 2
CIRCUIT BREAKER L. H. POWER CIRCUIT (5) to ON position.
4-216
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-12.
OPERATION OF TRACTOR TRUCKS.
a.
General. Tractor trucks covered in this manual are made to tow a semitrailer
with a maximum travel load of 17,000 pounds for cross-country travel and 36,000 pounds
for prepared road travel.
b.
Coupling the Semitrailer.
PERSONNEL: TWO
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Place tractor truck in front of trailer with wheel coupler jaws (1) almost touching
and directly in line with semitrailer king pin (2).
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) in N position.
4.
Pull handbrake lever (4) up to on position.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-217
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
2.
Adjust trailer landing gear (1) to raise or lower semitrailer skid plate (2). Skid
plate should be slightly lower than tractor fifth wheel (3).
Check to see that semitrailer wheel chocks (4) are in place.
NOTE
Refer to the operator’s manual, for the trailer
to be coupled, for instructions on how to raise
or lower landing gear.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-218
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
F R A M E
3
1.
Turn safety latch (1) to right or left to set locking plunger free.
2.
Move operating handle (2) forward until it stays in forward position. Coupler
jaws (3) are now unlocked.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-219
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
i
Pull up on coupling half (1) of emergency airbrake hose (2) and take it from stowage
bracket (3).
GO TO FRAME 5
4-220
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Pull up on dummy coupling (1) and take it off semitrailer emergency airbrake
coupling half (2).
CAUTION
Be sure to plug tractor emergency airbrake hose
to semitrailer emergency coupling and service
airbrake hose to service coupling. Hoses not
hooked up right can cause brakes not to operate.
2.
Place tractor emergency airbrake hose coupling half (3) to semitrailer emergency
coupling half (2) and turn it down to lock.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-221
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Pull up on coupling half (1) of service airbrake hose (2) to take it from stowage
bracket (3).
GO TO FRAME 7
4-222
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Pull up on dummy coupling (1) to take it off semitrailer service airbrake
coupling half (2).
2.
Place tractor service airbrake hose coupling half (3) to semitrailer service
airbrake coupling half (2) and turn down to lock.
GO TO FRAME 8
4-223
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
1.
Place both service and emergency cutout cocks (1) in side-to-side position, to turn
on air supply.
GO TO FRAME 9
4-224
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
1.
Pull down on airbrake hand control lever (1) to check service airbrake system.
Air should be heard passing through control valve.
NOTE
If air flow is not heard, recheck hose connections and position of cutout cocks. If they are correct, tell organizational
maintenance.
GO TO FRAME 10
4-225
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 10
1.
Set handbrake lever (1) to off (down) position.
2.
Slowly back tractor under semitrailer until fifth wheel locking jaws (2) are
securely locked around semitrailer king pin (3). Place FRONT TRANSMISSION
gear shift lever (4) in N position.
3.
Set handbrake lever (1) to on (up) position.
4.
Check fifth wheel to make sure that operating lever (5) is in rearward (locked)
position; and that safety latch (6) is in vertical position.
GO TO FRAME 11
4-226
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 11
1.
Set handbrake lever (1) to off (down) position.
2.
With semitrailer airbrake hand control lever (2) in down (on) position, slowly
move tractor forward to get positive locking of semitrailer king pin (3) with fifth
wheel (4).
3.
When you are sure that locking is positive, place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift
lever (5) in N position.
4.
Stop engine, (refer to para 4-6e) and set handbrake lever (1) to on (up) position.
5.
Raise trailer landing gear (6).
GO TO FRAME 12
4-227
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 12
1.
Take electrical cable connector (1) from stowage clamp (2).
2.
Pull back on cap (3) on connector (1) until it locks open.
GO TO FRAME 13
4-228
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 13
1.
Pull back and hold cap (1) of trailer electrical receptacle (2).
CAUTION
When plugging the tractor electrical cable connector (3)
into the trailer receptacle do not force the connector.
Forcing the connector could damage pins.
2.
Plug tractor electrical cable connector (3) into trailer receptacle (2).
3.
Let lip (4) on trailer receptacle cap (1) go into slot (5) in cable connector (3).
GO TO FRAME 14
4-229
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 14
Soldier A
1.
Using thumb, lift up on unlock lever (1) and hold it up.
2.
Using forefinger, pull down main switch (2) to DRIVE position.
Let go of unlock lever (1).
Soldier B
3.
Check semitrailer running lights (3) to see if they are on.
Soldier A
Soldier B
4.
5.
Press service foot brake (4) .
Soldier A
6.
Turn main switch (2) to STOP position.
Check semitrailer stop lights (5) to see if they go on.
NOTE
If lights do not work right tell organizational maintenance.
4-230
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Uncoupling the Semitrailer.
c.
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Place truck where you want to leave semitrailer.
3.
Set semitrailer airbrake hand control (1) to on (down) position.
4.
Set handbrake lever (2) to on (up) position.
5.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION lever (3) in N position.
6.
Lower semitrailer landing gear (4). (Refer to TM for trailer).
7.
Pull back on hinged cap (5) and take out electrical connector (6) from receptacle (7).
8.
Push cap (8) closed on connector (6).
9.
Place connector (6) in stowage clamp (9) on hose support (10).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-231
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Turn safety latch (1) to set locking plunger free.
2.
Move operating handle (2) forward until it remains in forward position.
3.
Coupler jaws (3) are now unlocked.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-232
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Move handbrake lever (1) to off (down) position.
2.
Slowly move tractor forward until fifth wheel (2) is clear of semitrailer skid
plates (3).
3.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
GO TO FRAME 4
4-233
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Set handbrake lever (1) to on (up) position.
2.
3.
Move FRONT TRANSMISSION gear shift lever (2) to N position.
4.
5.
6.
4-234
Set semitrailer airbrake hand control lever (3) to off (up) position.
Turn both cutout cocks (4) to off (up and down) position to turn off the air supply.
Unlock and separate emergency and service hose coupling halves (5) from
semitrailer coupling halves (6).
Place emergency and service hose coupling halves (5) on stowage bracket (7) on
hose support (8).
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-13.
OPERATION OF DUMP TRUCKS.
a. General. Dump trucks covered in this manual may be used as regular cargo carriers,
or for dumping and spreading operations. Payload capacity for cross country operation is
5,000 pounds. Payload capacity for prepared roads is 10,000 pounds. Refer to table 4-2,
weight chart for typical materials.
Table 4-2. Weight of Material in Truck
Capacity
Weight of Material
(lb)
Level Full
(2. 51 CU yd
or 67.79 tuft)
Heaping Full
(3. 76 CU yd
or 101.50 cu ft)
Loaded Weight
(lb approx)
Loaded Weight
(lb approx)
Material
Per cu-ft
Ashes (soft coal)
Cinders
Clay:
Dry
Wet
Coal:
Anthracite
Bituminous
Coke
Concrete mix (wet)
Coral rock
Earth:
Dry or moist (loose)
Dry or moist (packed)
Garbage:
Wet
Dry (paper wrapped)
Gravel
Limestone (crushed)
Masonry (dry rubble)
Mortar
Mortar (dry rubble)
Mud
Sand:
Dry (loose)
Dry (packed)
Wet or moist
Stones (loose)
Per cu-yd
44
46
1,188
1,242
2,985
3,120
4,470
4,675
63
110
1,701
2,970
4,270
7,460
6,400*
11,175†
52
47
28
124
25
1,404
1,269
756
3,618
675
3,525
3,190
1,900
9,095*
1,695
5,280
4,775
2,845
13,615†
2,540
80
96
2,160
2,592
5,425*
6,510
8,125*
9,750*
47
13
110
95
122
100
138
115
1,269
351
2,970
2,565
3,294
2,700
3,726
3,105
3,190
881
7,460*
6,435*
8,280*
6,780*
9,360*
7,800*
4,775
1,320
11,175†
9,650*
12,390†
10,150†
14,025†
11,690
98
110
122
95
2,646
2,970
3,294
2,565
6,645*
7,460*
8,280*
6,435*
9,950*
11,175†
12,390†
9,650*
* Over the rated cross-country payload.
† Over the rated cross-country and highway payload.
4-235
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b.
Rigging the Tailgate.
(1) Rigging to swing open at bottom for dumping and spreading
operations.
1.
Pass free end of chains (1) through retainers (2) and through holes at top
of locking slots (3).
2.
Leave enough slack in chains (1) to let tailgate (4) swing open. Opening must
be wide enough for material to slip through when body is lifted.
3.
Lock chains (1) in place by slipping them down to bottom of locking slots ( 3).
4-236
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(2) Rigging to swing open at top for regular loading or unloading.
FRAME 1
1.
Move chains (1) up, from locking position at bottom of lower locking slot (2)
to hole at top of slot. Take chains out of slots and retainers (3).
2.
Put chains (1) through holes at top of upper locking slots (4).
3.
Pull locking pins (5) out and move tailgate (6) down slowly. Do not let it drop.
4.
Pull chains (1) through until they hold weight of tailgate (6) in open position,
in line with truck bed (7).
5.
Slip chains (1) to bottom of locking slots (4) to lock them in position.
4-237
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
1.
2.
Loading the Dump Truck.
(1) Loading from the top.
Start engine.
(Refer to para 4-6b.)
Move truck so that dump body (1) is under loading device (2).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-238
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Pull handbrake lever (1) up, to on position.
2.
Press down on clutch pedal (2) all the way.
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) in position N, and let clutch pedal
(2) come up.
4.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
GO TO FRAME 3
4-239
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Rig tailgate (1) for loading. Refer to para 4-13b.
2.
Load truck, following payload capacity given in table 4-2, and standard safety
precautions.
4-240
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(2) Loading from the end.
FRAME 1
1.
Rig for loading and lower tailgate (1). Refer to para 4-13b.
2.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
Back truck into position near loading ramp or platform.
3.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-241
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Pull handbrake lever (1) up, to on position.
2.
Press down on clutch pedal (2) all the way.
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) in position N, and let clutch
pedal (2) come up.
4. Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
GO TO FRAME 3
4-242
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Load truck, following payload capacity given in table 4-2, and standard safety
precautions.
2.
After loading is finished, lift tailgate (1) to closed position, and lock it in place
with locking pins (2).
4-243
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Unloading the Dump Truck with Body Down.
FRAME 1
1.
Rig for unloading and lower tailgate (1) to flat position. (Refer to para 4-13b.)
2.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
3.
Back truck up to unloading dock or platform.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-244
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Pull handbrake lever (1) up, to on position.
2.
Press down on clutch pedal (2) all the way down.
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) in position N, and let clutch
pedal (2) come up.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
4.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-245
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Unload truck, following all safety precautions.
2.
After unloading, lift tailgate (1) and lock in place with locking pins (2) on both sides
of tailgate.
4-246
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Unloading the Dump Truck by Dumping.
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Place truck so that tailgate (1) is over dumping area.
3.
Pull handbrake lever (2) up to on position.
4.
Press down on clutch pedal (3) all the way.
5.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (4) in N position and let clutch
pedal (3) come up.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-247
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Rig tailgate (1) to swing open at bottom. (Refer to para 4-13b.)
2.
Open tailgate lock by pulling tailgate hand lever (2) forward and down.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-248
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Set safety lock (1) on hoist control lever (2) free.
2.
Step down on accelerator pedal (3) far enough to keep engine from stalling.
3.
Press down on clutch pedal (4) all the way.
4.
Move hoist control lever (2) forward, all the way to position D, to lift dump body.
5.
Let clutch pedal (4) up.
6.
When dump body is up as high as needed to dump load, move hoist control lever (2)
back, to position C. This will stop lifting and will hold dump body position.
7.
Dump load.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-249
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
After dumping load, clear area near tailgate (1) of all material.
Move hoist control lever (2) to position B, to let dump body down.
After dump body is down, move hoist control lever (2) to position A.
Put safety lock (3) on.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
GO TO FRAME 5
4-250
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Push tailgate hand lever (1), up and toward rear of truck to lock tailgate in closed
position.
4-251
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
f.
Unloading the Dump Truck by Spreading.
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Place truck so that tailgate (1) is over starting point of area to be spread.
3.
pull handbrake lever (2) up, to on position.
Press clutch pedal (3) all the way down.
4.
5.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (4) in position N, and let clutch
pedal (3) come up.
6.
Rig tailgate (1) to swing open at bottom. (Refer to para. 4-13b.) Adjust tailgate
chains (5) to control opening for material to be spread.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-252
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Open tailgate lock by pushing tailgate hand lever (1) forward and down.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-253
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Set safety lock (1) on hoist control lever (2) free.
2.
Step down on accelerator pedal (3) far enough to keep engine from stalling.
3.
Press down on clutch pedal (4) all of the way.
4.
Move hoist control lever (2) forward, all the way to position D, to lift dump body.
5.
Let clutch pedal (4) up.
6.
When dump body is up high enough to begin spreading, move hoist control lever (2)
to position C. This will stop lifting and will hold dump body in position.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-254
TM 9-2320209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Set handbrake (1) free and slowly move truck along spreading area. Move hoist
control lever (2) forward, to position D, or back to position B, to control the flow
of material.
2.
After material has been spread, stop truck and move hoist control lever (2) to
position B, to lower dump body.
When dump body is all the way down, move hoist control lever (2) to position A,
and lock lever in place with safety lock (3).
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
3.
4.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-255
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
4-256
Move tailgate hand lever (1) up and toward back of truck to lock tailgate in place.
TM
4-14.
9-2320-209-10-1
OPERATION OF PIPELINE CONSTRUCTION TRUCK.
a.
General. The M756A2 Pipeline Construction Truck has an open top metal body
with a wood-metal reinforced flat-bed. The truck is equipped with a rear winch, a winch
and cab protector, two gin poles for constructing an A-frame, two 24-volt flood lights, a
tailboard roller, a custom made tool box, and stiff leg jacks for additional support.
Weather protection for personnel and equipment is provided by a cargo body tarpaulin, with
end curtains supported by top bows. Front and side cargo body panels with racks support
the top bows. These panels and racks are easily removable for side loading. The side
cargo racks have built-in troop seats so that the truck can be used as a personnel carrier
when necessary.
b.
Operating the Rear Winch.
TOOLS: Offset flat tip screw driver
9/16-inch wrench
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Place vehicle so that winch (1) is in a direct line with object to be pulled or
lifted (2).
3.
Pull handbrake lever (3) up, to on position, and place FRONT TRANSMISSION
gearshift lever (4) in N position.
4.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
5.
Place wheel chocks (5) against rear wheels.
6.
Lower tailgate (6). (Refer to para 4-8b.)
GO TO FRAME 2
4-257
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Unhook safety pins (1), pull out tee locking pins (2), and pull stiff leg jacks
(3) from their compartments on each side of truck.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-258
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Move lower leg (1) up or down in upper leg (2) until bottom of lower leg
rests firmly on ground.
2.
Put tee locking pin (3) into highest visible hole in lower leg (1).
3.
Make legs (1 and 2) fast by putting safety pin (4) into hole at end of tee
locking pin (3).
4.
Do steps 1 through 3 on other side of truck.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-259
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Pullout drum lock (1), turn it 90° (one-quarter turn) until wing on knob (2)
slips into shallow groove on poppet nut (3).
2.
Place drum clutch lever (4) in off position, toward center of truck.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-260
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
WARNING
Always wear protective gloves when handling winch
cable. Do not let winch cable slip through hands. Rusty
or broken wires can cause serious injury.
1.
Pull end of winch cable (1) out far enough to reach load (2). Make it fast to load.
2.
Always keep tension on cable. If drum overspins working underneath truck, using
offset screwdriver, turn adjusting screw (3) right, to tighten drag brake.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-261
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
CAUTION
Do not let engine run with FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift
lever (1) in gear and TRANSFER CASE shifting lever (2)
in neutral position without the transfer POWER TAKEOFF
LEVER (3) in ON position. This could cause bearing
failure in transfer. Always shift FRONT TRANSMISSION
gearshift lever (1) to N when not operating the transfer
power takeoff.
1.
Start engine.
2.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (1) in N position.
3.
Turn locking bar (4) and pull transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (3) back to
on position.
Place TRANSFER CASE shifting lever (2) in neutral position.
4.
GO TO FRAME 7
4-262
(Refer to para 4-6b.)
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
WARNING
Do not overload winch or operate it with less than four
turns of cable on drum; either condition can damage
winch.
Do not allow personnel near calbe during winch operation.
If cable should snap or fray it can cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not force winch clutch lever (1) or the clutch and get
damaged.
1.
Shift winch clutch lever (1) to on position, (toward left side of truck).
NOTE
If winch clutch lever (1) is hard to shift, with powertake
off shifting lever in on position, place transmission in gear
and slip engine clutch slightly.
GO TO FRAME 8
4-263
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
NOTE
Distance between truck and load has an effect on maximum
rated pull. Maximum (20, 000 lbs) is available only when
enough cable is run out to completely show the first layer
on winch drum.
1.
2.
Step on and press clutch pedal (1) all the way down.
Move FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) to a forward position.
(a) Use position 3 for average load.
(b) Use lower gearshift positions for extra heavy loads.
GO TO FRAME 9
4-264
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
WARNING
Before letting clutch pedal up, make sure that there is no
loose cable on winch drum. Loose cable can cause damage to
cable and serious injury to personnel.
CAUTION
When drawing in slack cable, do not let loops form in cable. Loops
will become kinks as load pulls cable tight. A kinked cable is
a weak cable.
1.
Let clutch pedal (1) up slowly and wind in slack cable.
GO TO FRAME 10
4-265
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
2.
When all slack cable has been drawn in, lift load just off the ground.
Step on, and press clutch pedal all the way down to stop winch.
3.
Safety brake should hold load.
CAUTION
Do not turn brake adjusting screw (1) out (to the left)
more than one full turn. Screw will come out of brake
drum and brake drum will have to be taken apart to fix.
4.
If safety brake does not hold, working underneath truck, using wrench, turn
brake adjustment screw (1) right to tighten brake.
5.
Do steps 1 through 3 again.
organizational maintenance.
GO TO FRAME 11
4-266
If safety brake still does not hold, tell
TM 9-2320 -209-10-1
FRAME 11
1.
To lower load or unwind winch cable under power:
(a) Press clutch pedal (1) in all the way.
(b) Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) in R position.
(c) Let clutch pedal (1) up slowly.
NOTE
When unwinding cable under power, always keep tension on
cable so that cable does not crossover.
GO TO FRAME 12
4-267
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 12
1.
At end of winch operations:
(a) Step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all the way down.
(b) Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) in N position.
(c) Place transfer POWER TAKE OFF LEVER, (3) in off position and lock in place
with locking bar (4).
2.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
GO TO FRAME 13
4-268
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Pull out drum lock (1) and turn it 90° (one-quarter turn) until wing on knob
(2) slips into deep groove on poppet nut (3).
2.
Let drum lock (1) mesh with poppet nut (3).
3.
Turn winch drum (4) until poppet meshes with winch drum flange.
GO TO FRAME 14
4-269
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
4-270
Lift jack legs (1) and (2) up to level position and push legs about 1 foot into
stowage compartments (3).
Take safety pins (4) out of tee locking pins (5) and pull locking pins out.
Push leg (1) into leg (2) and aline last holes.
Push tee locking pins (5) through hole but do not let pins extend out of
other side of leg (2).
Push jack legs (1) and (2) all the way into stowage compartment (3).
Turn tee locking pin (5) handles to up and down position and push pins all
the way in.
Put safety pins (4) through holes in end of tee locking pins (5) and lock
safety pins.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Rigging the A-Frame for Rear Operation.
TOOLS: Pliers
1.
Take off tailgate, front and side racks. (Refer to para 4-8b, f).
2.
Loosen wing nuts (1) and free gin poles (2) from side clamps (3).
3.
Lift gin poles (2) and place them on top of cab protector (4).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-271
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Put trunion (1) through ring ends (2) of both boom chains.
2.
Put trunion (1) through yoke ends (3) of both gin poles.
3.
Turn trunion (1) until it locks into place.
Lock hook end of boom chains (4) into boom chain bracket (5), thirty links from hook.
4.
NOTE
Chain lengths must be the same.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-272
TM 9-2320 -209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Place gin pole sheave assembly (1) into trunion (2).
2.
3.
Put retaining pin (3) through trunion (2) and sheave assembly (1).
Put cotter pins (4) into holes at both ends of retaining pin (3) and using pliers,
bend open ends of cotter pins out.
4.
Place tailboard sheave assembly (5) in rear well and make it fast with retaining
pin (6) and two cotter pins (7).
GO TO FRAME 4
4-273
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Turn handnuts (1) and (2) to unscrew retaining pins (3) and (4) from side
plate (5) and (6).
2.
Turn side plates (5) and (6) left or right 90°.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-274
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Pull winch cable (1) out from winch (2). (Refer to para 4-14.)
2.
Place cable (1) under, around, and over tailboard sheave (3).
3.
Bring end of winch cable (1) straight back and place it under, around, and over
A-frame sheave (4).
4.
Turn pintle (5) so that hook (6) is on top.
5.
Bring hook end of winch cable (1) straight back and hook it to pintle (5).
GO TO FRAME 6
4-275
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Move side plates (1 and 2) back into place.
2.
Make side plates (1 and 2) fast with retaining pins (3 and 4), and handnuts (5 and 6).
3.
Pull U-bolt (7) up and hook it over tailboard sheave bracket (8).
GO TO FRAME 7
4-276
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Take up slack in winch cable (1) and slowly operate winch, refer to para 4-14b,
until A-frame (2) reaches operating position.
2.
If necessary, by hand, push A-frame (2) over center, until it is in operating
position.
3.
Let winch cable (1) go slack, and unhook U-bolt (3) from tailboard sheave assembly
(4). Push U-bolt down even with truck bed.
4.
Unhook winch cable (1) from pintle hook (5).
NOTE
Height of the A-frame (2) can be changed by making boom chains
(6) longer or shorter. Place A-frame at a higher angle for
heavy loads. Make a second (auxiliary) chain (7) fast to each
safety chain (8) and to bumpers (9), so that there wont be
any backlash.
4-277
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Lowering the A-Frame and Preparing Truck for Travel after Rear Operation.
TOOLS: Pliers
FRAME 1
1.
Lift U-bolt (1) and hook it to tailboard sheave bracket (2).
2.
Put hook end (3) of winch cable onto left center lashing ring (4).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-278
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
CAUTION
Do not let A-frame go past center. It will free
and damage equipment.
1.
Operate rear winch, refer to paragraph 4-14b, to raise A-frame (1) up to
about an 80° position.
2.
Reset boom chains (2) to support A-frame (1) in this position.
CAUTION
Too much slack will allow A-frame to smash down on
cab roof.
3.
Take hook end of winch cable (3) from left center lashing ring (4) and hook it
onto pintle (5). Leave a small amount of slack (about 2 feet) in winch cable.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-279
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Hand pull boom chain (1) and bring A-frame (2) to an angle of about 80°.
2.
Using winch, slowly lower A-frame (2) until it rests on top of cab protector (3).
GO TO FRAME 4
4-280
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Run winch until winch cable (1) is slack, stop winch, unhook end of winch cable
from pintle (2).
2.
Unhook U-bolt (3) from tailboard sheave bracket (4).
3.
Lower U-bolt (3) until it is even with truck bed.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-281
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Turn handnuts (1) and (2) to unscrew retaining pins (3) and (4) from side
plates (5) and (6).
2.
Turn sideplates (5) and (6) left or right 90°.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-282
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Slip cable (1) out of A-frame sheave (2) and tailboard sheave (3).
GO TO FRAME 7
4-283
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Move side plates (1 and 2) back to closed position.
2.
Put retaining pins (3 and 4) into place and tighten with handnuts (5 and 6).
GO TO FRAME 8
4-284
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
1.
Step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all the way down.
2.
Move FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) to N position.
3.
Move transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (3) to off position and lock, in place with
locking bar (4).
4.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
GO TO FRAME 9
4-285
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Turn winch drum (1) by hand and wind in winch cable.
2.
Pull winch drum lock knob (2) out and turn it 90° (one-quarter turn).
3.
Let wing on winch drum lock knob (2) slip into deep slot on poppet seat.
3.
Turn winch drum (1) until poppet meshes with winch drum flange.
Go TO FRAME 10
4-286
TM 9-2320 -209-10-1
FRAME 10
1.
Using pliers, straighten ends of cotter pin (1) and take it out of retaining pin (2).
2.
Take retaining pin (2) out of trunion (3) and A-frame sheave assembly (4).
3.
Take A-frame sheave assembly (4) out of trunion (3).
GO TO FRAME 11
4-287
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 11
1.
Unhook end of boom chains (1) from boom chain brackets (2).
2.
Turn trunion (3) to unlock it.
3.
Take trunion (3) out of yoke of each of both gin poles (4).
4.
Take ring ends of both boom chains (5) off ends of trunion (3).
GO TO FRAME 12
4-288
TM 9-2320-209-20-1
FRAME 12
1.
Lower gin poles (1), and place them onto bracket (2).
2.
Lock gin poles (1) in place with clamp (3), and tighten wig nuts (4).
GO TO FRAME 13
4-289
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 13
1.
Using pliers, straighten ends of cotter pins (1), and remove them from retaining
pin (2).
2.
Take tailboard sheave (3) out of mount in truck bed.
3.
Front rack, side racks and tailgate can now be put back into place, if required.
(Refer to para 4-8.)
4-290
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Rigging the A-Frame for Side Operation.
TOOLS :
1/2-inch wrench
5/8-inch wrench
FRAME 1
1.
Using 1/2-inch wrench, take out four machine screws (1) from gin pole link
holding pins (2) on both sides of truck.
2.
Take out two link pins (2).
3.
Loosen two wing nuts (3), on each side of truck and take gin poles (4), out
of two side clamps (5).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-291
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Get two gin pole side mounting adapters (1) from storage compartment.
2.
Find stake pockets with bolt holes at front and rear end of truck bed.
3.
Place adapters (1) into front and rear stake pockets on side of truck to be
used.
Using 5/8-inch wrench, make adapters (1) fast with capscrews and lockwashers
(2).
4.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-292
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Place gin pole holding links (1) into adapter slots (2).
2.
Using 1/2-inch wrench, make links (1) fast with holding pins (3), and machine screws
and lockwashers (4).
GO TO FRAME 4
4-293
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1. Put trunion (1) through ring ends (2) of boom chains and yoke ends (3) of both
gin poles.
2. Turn trunion (1) to right until it is locked into position.
3. Put A-frame sheave (4) into trunion (1), make it fast with retaining pin (5)
and two cotter pins (6).
GO TO FRAME 5
4-294
M 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Place boom chains (1) over truck bed and through lashing rings (2) on end of
truck bed.
2.
Double boom chains (1) back and place hook into chain about fifteen links from
lashing ring (2).
GO TO FRAME 6
4-295
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Place tailboard sheave mount (1) into center sheave mount well.
2.
Make sheave mount (1) fast with retaining pin (2) and two cotter pins (3).
GO TO FRAME 7
4-296
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Loosen two handnuts (1), on sheave assembly (2) and A-frame sheave (3),
to unscrew retaining pin (4) from side plate (5).
2.
Turn side plate (5) left or right 90°.
GO TO FRAME 8
4-297
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Free spool winch cable. (Refer to para 4-14 b.)
2.
Run winch cable (1) under forward boom chain, and under, around, and over
sheave assembly (2).
3.
Run winch cable (1) over and under A-frame sheave (3).
4.
Hook end (4) to lashing ring (5).
GO TO FRAME 9
4-298
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
1.
Move side plate (1) on sheave assembly (2) and A-frame sheave (3) back into
place.
2.
Put retaining pins (4) back into sheave assembly (2) and A-frame sheave (3).
3.
Tighten with two handnuts (5).
GO TO FRAME 10
4-299
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 10
1.
Take up slack in winch cable, and raise A-frame (1) to position shown. (Refer
to para 4-14 b.)
2.
Adjust boom chains (2) to hold A-frame (1) in position shown.
NOTE
Height of the A-frame (1) can be changed by making
boom chains (2) longer or shorter. Place A-frame at
a high angle for heavy loads.
GO TO FRAME 11
4-300
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 11
1.
2.
Place an adapter ring (1) onto lashing ring (2) on each end of A-frame side of
truck bed.
Put a safety chain (3) onto each adapter ring (1).
3.
Take the end of winch cable (4) from lashing ring (5).
4-301
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
f.
Lowering the A-Frame and Preparing Truck for Travel after Side Operation.
TOOLS :
Pliers
1/2-inch wrench
5/8-inch wrench
1.
Hook end of winch cable (1) to lashing ring (2). Take up slack in cable.
(Refer to para 4-14 b.)
2.
Unhook boom chains (3) and safety chains (4), then, slowly lower A-frame to
ground.
3.
Take off chain adapter (5), safety chains (4), and boom chain (3).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-302
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Turn handnuts (1 and 2) to unscrew retaining pins (3 and 4) from side plates (5 and 6).
2.
Turn side plates (5 and 6) left or right 90°
GO TO FRAME 3
4-303
TM 9-2320-209-20-1
1.
Take winch cable (1) out of A-frame sheave (2), and sheave assembly (3).
2.
Unhook end of winch cable (1) from lashing ring (4).
3.
Wind winch cable (1) onto winch drum. (Refer to para 4-14 b.)
GO TO FRAME 4
I
4-304
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
2.
Move side plates (1) back into closed position on A-frame sheave (2) and
sheave assembly (3).
Make side plates (1) fast with retaining pins (4) and tighten handnuts (5).
GO TO FRAME 5
4-305
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Using pliers, straighten bent ends of cotter pins (1) and remove there from
retaining pin (2).
2.
Take retaining pin (2) out of trunion (3) and A-frame sheave (4).
3.
Take A-frame sheave (4) out of trunion (3).
G0 TO FRAME 6
4-306
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
2.
Using 1/2-inch wrench, loosen and takeout four machine screws (1).
Pull two link holding pins (2) from both gin pole adapters (3) and links (4).
3.
4.
Lift gin poles (5) out of adapters (3).
Using 5/8-inch wrench, takeout capscrews (6), and lift out adapters (3).
GO TO FRAME 7
4-307
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
2.
3.
Put link ends of gin poles (1) back into tailboard bracket (2).
Put gin pole link holding pins (3) back into place in tailboard bracket (2) and
through gin pole links (4).
Using l/2-inch wrench, make gin pole link holding pins (3) fast with machine
screws (5).
GO TO FRAME 8
4-308
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
1.
Place gin poles (1) on side clamp brackets (2).
2.
Make gin poles (1) fast with clamps (3) and wing nuts (4).
GO TO FRAME 9
4-309
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
1.
Using pliers, straighten bent ends of cotter pins (1) and take them out of
retaining pin (2).
2.
Take retaining pin (2) out to sheave assembly mount (3).
3.
Lift sheave and mount assembly (4) out of center sheave mount well.
Put all parts back into proper storage places.
4.
4-310
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-15.
OPERATION OF EARTH BORING MACHINE AND POLESETTER TRUCKS.
a. General. M764 earth boring machine and polesetter trucks are equipped with a
rear earth boring machine, rear winch, and collapsible cable reel. The rear winch is
used with the earth boring machine derrick to set and pull poles, and with collapsible
cable reel to take up or lay wire and light cable.
b.
Preparing the Truck for Boring Operation.
1.
Start engine.
2.
Place truck so rack bar (1) will be directly over hole location when in boring
position.
3.
Press clutch pedal (2) down.
4.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gear shift lever (3) in N position. Let clutch
pedal (2) up slowly.
5.
Pull handbrake (4) up to on position.
6.
Take wheel chocks (5) from side of truck and place them against rear wheels.
(Refer to para 4-6b.)
GO TO FRAME 2
4-311
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Let engine run at idle speed, press clutch pedal (1) all the way down.
2.
3.
Place TRANSFER CASE gearshift lever (2) in neutral position.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) in position 1.
4.
Turn locking bar (4) to off position.
5.
6.
Place transfer POWER TAKE OFF LEVER (5) all the way to rear to ENGAGE (on)
position.
Place control lever (6) in EARTH AUGER position.
7.
Let clutch pedal (1) up slowly.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-312
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
NOTE
OUTRIGGERS control levers (1) and (2) are spring
loaded and will return to NEUTRAL when let go.
1.
Move OUTRIGGERS control levers (1) and (2) to UP position one at a time to raise
inner outrigger legs (3) a little to free safety latches (4).
2.
Pull safety latches (4) out and turn to up position against upper outrigger legs (5).
3.
Move OUTRIGGERS control levers (1) and (2) to DOWN position one at a time to
lower inner outrigger legs (3) about halfway.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-313
TM 9-2320-209-20-1
FRAME 4
1.
Take outrigger shoes (1) from stowage brackets (2), (right and left sides).
2.
Place outrigger shoes (1) on end of inner outrigger legs (3) and make them fast with
retaining pins (4).
3.
Operate OUTRIGGER S control levers (5 and 6) until outrigger shoes (1) press against
ground to make machine steady and level.
4-314
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c. Raising, Leveling, and Lowering the Derrick Tube.
TOOLS: 1-inch ratchet wrench
FRAME 1
WARNING
Be certain there are no overhead power lines or other
obstructions before raising derrick from travel position,
accidental contact can cause serious injury and damage.
1.
Step on and press clutch pedal (1) in all of the way.
2.
Check that TRANSFER CASE shift lever (2) is in neutral position.
3.
Check that transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (3) is in ENGAGE position.
4.
Check that power divider control lever (4) is in EARTH AUGER position.
5.
Check that FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (5) is in position 1.
6.
Let clutch pedal (1) up slowly.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-315
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
WARNING
Whenever you leave the operator’s area lock the
feed and drive control levers in brake position.
This will prevent movement of the boring machine
and possible injury to personnel or damage to
equipment. Refer to frame (8) for locking procedures.
1.
To unlock feed and drive control levers (1 and 2):
(a) Pull and hold feed and drive control levers (1 and 2) toward operator.
(b) Lift locking latch (3) by hand and turn it away from operator.
(c) Let go of levers (1 and 2).
GO TO FRAME 3
4-316
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
NOTE
Auger end of rack bar will tend to move away from boring
case when derrick is raised. Raise auger rack bar from
time to time to prevent it from hitting the ground. However,
do not raise it high enough to compress the bumper spring
against the boring case.
1.
To raise derrick:
(a) Move power leveler shifting handle (1) down.
(b) Place feed control lever (2) in NEUTRAL position.
(c) Move drive control lever (3) forward to raise derrick (4).
(d) If rack bar (5) gets too close to ground, push feed control lever (2) forward
to raise it. Let feed control lever come back to NEUTRAL position.
(e) Hold drive control lever (3) in forward position until leveling bubble (6) is nearly
centered.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-317
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
To move derrick to operator’s right:
(a) Move power-leveler shifting handle (1) up.
(b) Check that FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) is in position 1.
(c) Keep feed control lever (3) in NEUTRAL position.
(d) Move drive control lever (4) forward to move derrick (5) to right. Let
handle (4) come back to NEUTRAL when derrick gets to position you want.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-318
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
To move derrick to operator’s left:
(a) Step on clutch pedal (l) all the way down.
(b) Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) in R position.
(c) Let clutch pedal (1) up.
(d) Keep power-leveler shifting handle (3) up.
(e) Keep feed control lever (4) in NEUTRAL position.
(f) Move and hold drive control lever (5) forward until derrick (6) moves left to
position you want.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-319
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
NOTE
1.
Always level boring machine with engine operating at
idle speed. Leveling adjustments are easier to make
at idle speed.
To level boring machine:
(a) Move derrick (1) so that leveling bubble (2) is near center. Refer to
frames 3, 4, and 5.
(b) Using ratchet wrench, turn-front-to-back leveling adjustment (3) and
side-to-side leveling adjustment (4) to center leveling bubble (2).
(c) When leveling bubble (2) is centered in circle pull out power leveler
shifting handle (5). Set handle in neutral position.
GO TO FRAME 7
4-320
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
To lower derrick:
(a) Step on clutch pedal (1). Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever
(2) in R position. Let clutch pedal (1) up.
(b) Place power leveler shifting handle (3) in down position and keep feed
control lever (4) in NEUTRAL position.
(c) Place drive control lever (5) in forward position to lower derrick (6) into
cradle (7) on a protector (8).
CAUTION
Before locking latch (9) against feed and drive control
levers (4) and (5), let machine run with levers in neutral position. This will let heat escape from brake
assemblies in clutch case.
2.
(d) Place power leveler shifting handle (3) in NEUTRAL position.
To lock feed (4) and drive (5) control levers:
(a) Pull and hold feed and drive control levers (4) and (5) toward operator.
(b) Turn locking latch (9) to locked position.
(c) Let go of feed and drive control levers (4) and (5).
4-321
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Operating and Securing the Rear Winch.
FRAME 1
1.
Lift locking latch (1).
2.
Pull winch control lever (2) back as needed to control rear winch brake and
prevent free spooling.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-322
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
WARNING
When using derrick tube and rear winch together, do
not go over pulling capacity shown on CAUTION plate
mounted on derrick tube. Examine derrick tube carefully for damage before using. A tube bend or flat
surface can cause collapse under load. If tube is
damaged, tell organizational maintenance.
Always leave TRANSFER CASE gearshift lever (1) in
neutral position during winch operations to avoid
movement of truck.
1.
Press clutch pedal (2) all the way in.
2.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) in N position.
Place TRANSFER CASE gearshift lever (1) in neutral position.
3.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-323
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
WARNING
Always wear leather gloves when handling winch cable
to prevent injury from brakes or loose wires. Do not
let cable slide through hands. Do not let personnel
stand near winch cable during winch operation. A
snapped cable can cause series injury. Do not go over
load limits shown on winch load chart on cab door to
prevent shearing of winch shear pin.
1.
Pull rear winch cable (1) out by hand.
2.
Rig cable (1) on sheaves (2) as needed. (Refer to para 4-15j.)
3.
Raise derrick tube (3) if needed. (Refer to para 4- 15c.)
GO TO FRAME 4
4-324
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Turn locking bar (1) and place transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (2) to rear to
ENGAGE (on) position.
2.
Move rear winch control lever (3) forward to on position.
Place power divider control lever (4) in REAR WINCH FWD position to wind in
the load.
3.
4.
Place power divider control lever (4) in REAR WINCH REV position to lower
load or unwind winch cable.
5.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (5) in position 2.
6.
Let clutch pedal (6) up slowly and press down on accelerator pedal (7). Press
down just enough to operate
winch
without racing or stalling engine.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-235
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
2.
To stop winch drum from turning, press down on clutch pedal (1) and let accelerator
pedal (2) up.
Move power divider control lever (3) to NEUTRAL position.
3.
Let clutch pedal (1) come up slowly.
1.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-326
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
WARNING
Do not pull winch control lever (1) back while a load is still
hanging on cable. Taking winch control lever out of forward
position will cause load to drop.
1.
If there is a load attached to end of winch cable (2) do the following steps:
(a) Press clutch pedal (3) all of the way in.
(b) Place the power divider control lever (4) in the REAR WINCH REV position.
(c) Lower the load and unhook cable (2) from the load. Refer to frames 5 and 6.
2.
Lower derrick tube (5) if it was raised. (Refer to para 4-15c.)
3.
Remove winch cable (2) from sheaves (6) that were used. (Refer to para 4-15j.)
4.
Press clutch pedal (3) all of the way in.
5.
6.
Place power divider control lever (4) in REAR WINCH FWD position.
Let clutch pedal (3) up and wind in cable (2).
7.
Press clutch pedal (3) all of the way in.
8.
Place rear winch control lever (1) in NEUTRAL position and set locking latch (7).
GO TO FRAME 7
4-327
TM 9-2320-209-20-1
FRAME 7
1.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (1) in N position.
2.
Move transfer POWER TAKE OFF LEVER (2) to off position and turn locking bar (3)
to lock position.
3.
Let clutch pedal (4) up.
4.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
4-328
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Installing 9-inch, 12-inch, and 16-inch Augers.
(1) Lifting auger from stowed position.
FRAME 1
WARNING
To avoid injury to personnel and damage to equipment, do not
try to lift the 20-inch and 30-inch augers from their holders by
hand. These augers should be lifted with the rear winch and
boring machine integral derrick.
1.
Pick the size auger (1) to be installed on rack bar (2).
2.
Lift holder locking handle (3) out of bracket (4) and holder (5).
3.
Pull auger to holder pin (6) out of auger (1) and holder (5).
4.
Lift auger (1) out of stowed position.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-329
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(2) Installing auger onto the rack bar.
1.
Put rubber bumper (1) and bumper spring (2) onto rack bar (3).
2.
Put auger (4) onto rack bar (3).
3.
Make it fast with pin (5) and cotter pin (6).
4-330
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
f.
Installing 20-inch or 30-inch Augers.
(1) Lifting auger from stowed position.
PERSONNEL: Two
Pick the size auger (1) to be installed on rack bar (2).
Pull winch cable (3) out from winch.
Place cable (3) under, around, and over strap sheave (4).
Bring end of cable forward and over derrick sheave (5).
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
Raise and position derrick tube (6) so that end of winch cable (3) is directly over
auger (1) to be used. (Refer to para 4-15c and 4-15d.)
If seat (7) gets in the way of derrick (6) take seat off truck.
(a) Take safety pin (8) out.
(b) Pull retainer pin (9) out.
(c) Pull seat (7) up and take out of truck.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-331
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
WARNING
Be sure your feet are clear before pulling holder locking
handle out on 20-and/or 30-inch augers. Augers tilt to side
once handle has been taken out.
1.
Lift holder locking handle (1) out of bracket (2) and holder (3).
2.
Pull auger-to-holder pin (4) out of auger (5) and holder (3).
3.
Lift holder (3) out of auger (5).
GO TO FRAME 3
4-332
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
Soldier A 1.
2.
Put winch cable loop (1) into square auger mounting hole (2).
Put auger-to-holder pin (3) into hole in auger (4), through loop (1) and
into other side of hole in auger.
CAUTION
Never move winch control lever to off position when there
is a load on winch. This will cause the load to drop.
Be sure that winch cable does not bind against derrick sheave
cover while lifting auger and moving auger to rear of truck.
Guide auger with a tag line after auger is lifted from body.
Soldier B 3.
Operate rear winch. Refer to para 4-15d. Lift auger no higher than
necessary to move it to rear of truck.
Soldier A 4.
Guide auger with tag line.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-333
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Raise derrick (1) past straight up and down position so winch cable (2) will clear
boring case (3) when derrick is moved left.
2.
Operate rear winch, lower auger (4) to about one foot off ground.
3.
Move derrick (1) left until derrick and winch cable (2) are in line.
4.
Operate rear winch to lower auger (4) to ground.
5.
If seat (5) was taken off, put seat back:
(a) Place seat mounting tube (6) on seat mounting bracket (7) and aline holes.
(b) Place retaining pin (8) through holes and lock with safety pin (9).
GO TO FRAME 5
4-334
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Lock boring machine control levers (1) in back position with locking latch (2).
(Refer to para 4-15c.)
2.
Take auger-to-holder pin (3) out of auger (4).
3.
Lift cable (5) out of auger (4).
4.
Operate rear winch to take up cable. (Refer to para 4-15d.)
5.
Secure winch from operation.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-335
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(2) Installing 20-inch or 30-inch auger onto rack bar.
FRAME 6
1.
Place the derrick (1) in 45° position. (Refer to para 4-15c.)
2.
Align the rack bar (2) with the auger (3).
3.
Put rubber bumper (4) and spring (5) onto rack bar (2).
4.
Move feed control lever (6) forward to lower rack bar (2) into auger (3).
5.
Make auger (3) fast with pin (7) and cotter pin (8).
6.
Stop engine.
4-336
(Refer to para 4-6e.)
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Operating the Earth Boring Machine.
g.
TOOLS: 1-inch ratchet wrench
FRAME 1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Step on and press clutch pedal (1) in all of the way.
3.
Check that TRANSFER CASE shift lever (2) is in neutral position.
4.
Check that transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (3) is in ENGAGE position.
5.
6.
Check that power divider control lever (4) is in EARTH AUGER position.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (5) in position 1.
7.
Let clutch pedal (1) up slowly.
8. Set hand THROTTLE (6) to let engine run at 1800 rpm as shown on tachometer (7).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-337
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Lift boring machine control lever locking latch (1).
2.
Let feed control lever (2) and drive control lever (3) go to NEUTRAL (position 1,
table 4-3).
NOTE
Avoid moving both feed and drive control levers (2 and 3)
quickly at the same time. Move handles one at a time and
pause at NEUTRAL position.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-338
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Table 4-3. Boring Machine Controls
4-339
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
CAUTION
Do not use position 2 table 4-3 for boring. It will overload
equipment and can cause serious damage.
1.
Push drive control lever (1) forward while pulling back on feed control lever (2)
(position 2, table 4-3).
2.
Let auger (3) come down to ground.
NOTE
Inexperienced operators should hold feed control (2) in
NEUTRAL while pushing drive control (1) forward
(position 3, table 4-3).
GO TO FRAME 4
4-340
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
WARNING
Do not let personnel stand near auger while boring or
spinning soil off auger. Soil spun off may contain objects
that can cause injuries.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to boring machine, do not make sudden
starts (impact loads) when starting to bore. Do not load
auger above bumper spring.
1.
When auger point (1) enters ground, push drive control lever (2) and feed control
lever (3) forward to start boring (position 4, table 4-3).
2.
Keep auger turning speed down to 25 rpm (1800 engine rpm) until hole is about
18-inches deep.
3.
If auger is working smoothly, set auger turning speed for type of soil. (Refer to
table 4-4 and para 4-15h.)
GO TO FRAME 5
Table 4-4. Gear, Speed Settings for Soil Conditions
Soil Type
Transmission
Gear
Engine Speed
(rpm)
Auger Speed
(rpm)
Sandy Clay,
Ordinary Soil
3rd
2200-2650
90-110
Disintegrated
Shale, Similar
1st
Sandstone,
Frozen Soil
I
2nd
1800
1700-2400
25
40-60
4-341
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
When auger (1) is loaded, let go of both driver lever (2) and feed lever (3). Levers
will automatically go back to neutral position as shown in (position 1, table 4-3) and
auger will stop.
2.
Pull drive control lever (2) back and push feed control lever (3) forward as shown
in position 5 (table 4-3) to raise auger above ground level.
3.
Move drive control lever (2) into and out of neutral position to spin soil from auger.
Do not press down bumper spring.
4.
Let go of both drive control lever (2) and feed control lever (3) and let levers go back
to neutral position.
5.
Repeat frames 4 and 5 to drill hole as deep as needed.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-342
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
If auger (1) accidently becomes overloaded:
(a) Step on clutch pedal (2) and pressit all the way down.
(b) Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) in R position.
(c) Let clutch pedal (2) up.
(d) Pull feed control lever (4) back and push drive control lever (5) forward
(position 2 table 4-3). Auger (1) will back out of the hole.
GO TO FRAME 7
4-343
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Depth of hole bored is checked through sighting holes (l, 2, and 3) in derrick tube (4).
2.
When you can see bar guide (5) through sighting hole (1), bored hole is 8 feet deep.
3.
When bar guide (5) reaches sighting hole (2), bored hole is 9 feet deep.
4.
When bar guide (5) reaches sighting hole (3), bored hole is 10 feet deep.
GO TO FRAME 8
4-344
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 8
1.
After hole is dug, place feed control (1) forward and drive control (2) back as shown
in position 5, table 4-3.
2.
Raise auger (3) as far as possible without pressing down bumper springs (4).
3.
Pull back on both feed control (1) and drive control (2) as shown in position 7,
table 4-3.
4.
Place locking latch (5) in lock position.
GO TO FRAME 9
4-345
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
1.
Set hand THROTTLE (1) at engine idle speed.
2.
Move OUTRIGGERS control levers (2) back to raise outrigger legs (3).
3.
Move truck until auger is no longer over hole.
4-346
TM
h.
9-2320-209-10-1
Boring in Various Soils.
CAUTION
Use care so that auger and boring machine are not damaged
when boring in soil containing loose rock. Take loose rocks
larger than 10-inches in diameter out by hand or other means.
1.
To bore in disintegrated shale or similar soil, step
on clutch pedal (1). Set FRONT TRANSMISSION
gearshift lever (2) in position 1 and let clutch pedal
(1) up.
2.
Set hand THROTTLE (3) to let engine run at 1800 rpm,
as shown on tachometer (4). Auger will turn at about
25 rpm. (Refer to tables 4-3 and 4-4.)
GO TO FRAME 2
4-347
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Boring in disintegrated shale or similar rock requires sharp auger blades (1).
2.
If boring seems slower than usual check auger blade (1) and point (2). If either
or both blade and point are badly worn replace them.
3.
Blades (1) may be good for only 5 to 7 holes when boring in this type of soil.
4.
Auger points (2) may be good for one or two more holes.
5.
If there is too much vibration in derrick tube (3) when boring tell organizational
maintenance.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-348
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
To bore in sandstone or frozen ground step on clutch pedal (1). Place FRONT
TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) in position 2 and let clutch pedal (1) up.
2.
Pull hand THROTTLE (3) out to run engine at 1700-2400 rpm as shown on
tachometer (4). Auger will turn at 40-60 rpm. (Refer to tables 4-3 and 4-4.)
GO TO FRAME 4
4-349
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
To bore in sandy clay or ordinary soil step on clutch pedal (1). Place FRONT
TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) in position 3 and let clutch pedal (1) up.
2.
Pull hand THROTTLE (3) out to run engine at 2,200 to 2,650 rpm as shown on
Tachometer (4). Auger will turn at 90-110 rpm. (Refer to tables 4-3 and 4-4.)
GO TO FRAME 5
4-350
TM
9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
CAUTION
Brush rack teeth (1) with wire brush as necessary when boring
soil that sticks to rack teeth. This will prevent dirt from
getting into and damaging thrust plate inside of rack carriers
(2). Keep leveling worms and gears (3) free of sand and dirt
to prevent damage to gears.
1.
Take less load on auger (4) before lifting when boring in sandy clay or wet soil.
Too much suction will make load too heavy and strain the machine.
4-351
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Preparing Boring Machine for Travel.
i.
TOOLS: Pliers
FRAME 1
1.
2.
Set engine to idle speed.
3.
Place feed control lever (1) in NEUTRAL, drive control lever (2) forward
(position 3, table 4-3).
4.
Lower auger (3) until it is resting on top of level ground.
Move truck away from hole.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-352
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Using pliers, straighten bent ends and take cotter pin (1) out of retaining pin (2).
2.
Pull retaining pin (2) out of auger (3) and rack bar (4).
GO TO FRAME 3
4-353
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Lift boring machine control lever locking latch (1).
2.
Let feed control lever (2) and drive control lever (3) go to NEUTRAL position.
3.
Move feed control lever (2) forward and drive control lever (3) back (position 5,
table 4-3). Let rack bar (4) move up until it is out of auger.
4.
Let feed control lever (2) and drive control lever (3) return to NEUTRAL.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-354
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Slide bumper (1) and spring (2) upon rack bar (3).
2.
Put retaining pin (4) and cotter pin (5) back into hole in rack bar (3).
3.
Move feed control lever (6) forward and drive control lever (7) back (position 5,
table 4-3).
4.
Let rack bar (3) move up until rubber bumper (1) touches lower thrust platecap (8).
Do not press down spring (2).
5.
Pull feed control lever (6) and drive control lever (7) back and lock with latch (9).
GO TO FRAME 5
4-355
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
WARNING
Do not lift 20-inch or 30-inch augers by hand. Use the rear
winch and the derrick for lifting these augers. Personnel
may be injured or equipment damaged if you try to lift these
augers by hand. ( Refer to para 4-15f.)
1.
Lift the 9-inch (1), 12-inch (2) and 16-inch (3) auger onto truck body.
2.
Stow and make fast augers (1, 2, and 3) in proper holders.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-356
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
Position derrick (1) so that pointer (2) is directly over key (3) on support tube (4).
(Refer to para 4-15c.)
GO TO FRAME 7
4-357
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
Step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all the way down.
2.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) in position R.
3.
Let clutch pedal (1) up.
GO TO FRAME 8
4-358
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Pull feed control lever (1) and drive control lever (2) back and place latch (3) in
locked position.
2.
Place power leveler shifting handle (4) in down position.
3.
Place latch (3) in unlocked position.
4.
Keep feed control lever (1) in NEUTRAL position.
5.
Place drive control lever (2) in forward position to lower derrick (5) into cradle
(6) on cab protector (7).
NOTE
Before locking latch (3) against boring machine feed
control lever (1) and drive control lever (2), let machine
run with both levers in NEUTRAL position. This will
let heat escape from brake assemblies in clutch case.
6.
Pull both feed control lever (1) and drive control lever (2) to the rear and lock
in place with locking latch (3).
GO TO FRAME 9
4-359
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
1.
Move OUTRIGGERS control levers (1) one at a time to pull in outrigger legs (2)
half way.
2.
Take out retaining pins (3) and take off outrigger shoes (4).
3.
Stow shoes in stowage brackets (5).
4.
Move OUTRIGGERS control levers (1) one at a time to pull in outrigger legs (2) all
the way.
5.
Hook safety latch (6) over lug on end of each outrigger leg.
GO TO FRAME 10
4-360
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 10
1.
Step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all the way down.
2.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gear shift lever (2) in N position.
3.
Move transfer POWER TAKE OFF LEVER (3) to off position and set locking latch (4).
4.
Place power divider shifting lever (5) in NEUTRAL position.
5.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
4-361
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
j.
Dragging Poles.
CAUTION
Poles 20 feet or more from the derrick must be dragged
to the derrick using the snatch sheave. Dragging without
using snatch sheave will damage the derrick tube.
NOTE
Dragging the pole can be done with the derrick tube raised
or lowered. Raising the derrick tube will place the snatch
sheave a little higher.
1.
Rigging for dragging with derrick lowered:
(a) Pull winch cable (1) out from rear winch (2). (Refer to para 4-15d.)
(b) Place winch cable around snatch sheave (3) and tie cable to end of pole (4).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-362
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Rigging for dragging with derrick raised:
(a) Pull winch cable (1) out from rear winch (2). (Refer to para 4-15d.)
(b) Place winch cable (1) under and around strap sheave (3).
(c) Bring end of cable (1) forward, over and around derrick sheave (4).
(d) Raise derrick (5) to full apposition. (Refer to para4-15c.)
(e) Bring end of cable (1) around snatch sheave (6) and tie cable to end of pole (7).
GO T O FRAME 3
4-363
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Dragging (with derrick lowered or raised):
(a) Operate winch (1) to pull pole (2) toward truck. (Refer to para 4-15d.)
(b) Stop winch (1) when pole (2) gets close to truck.
(c) Slack off winch cable (3). (Refer to para 4-15d.)
2.
(d) Take cable (3) off pole (2).
Secure from dragging:
(a) Lower derrick (4) if it was raised. (Refer to para 4-15c.)
(b) Take winch cable (3) from sheaves (5, 6, or 7) if used.
(c) Operate winch to reel in winch cable (3). (Refer to para 4-15d.)
GO TO FRAME 4
4-364
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
k.
Setting Poles.
TOOLS:
Pike, pole, wood, 12 ft long
Spoon, hand, telegraph, 8 ft long, size 2
Tamp, backfill, 8 ft long, type III
Bar, digging and tamping, 8 ft long
Tagline
PERSONNEL: Two
FRAME 1
WARNING
Check derrick tube (1) carefully for damage before using.
A tube bend or flat spot can cause collapse under load. If
tube is damaged tell organizational maintenance.
When using derrick tube to lift loads. do not exceed pulling
capacities given on caution plate (2), mounted on derrick
tube.
1.
Place the truck so that the derrick sheave (3) will be in position above hole (4) when
derrick is placed for lifting.
2.
Place outriggers (5) in position on ground. (Refer to para 4-15b.)
GO TO FRAME 2
CHANGE 1
4-365
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Rig the winch cable (l) for derrick operation. (Refer to para 4-15f.)
2.
Raise the derrick tube (2). (Refer to para 4-15c.)
3.
Make winch cable (1) fast to pole (3), slightly above balance point (4).
4.
Operate rear winch (5) slowly to lift pole (3). (Refer to para 4-15d.)
5.
Stop the winch when pole (3) is just clear of ground and in position over hole (6).
GO TO FRAME 3
4-366
3? U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1989 643-025/80123
PIN: 046723-001
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
CAUTION
Be very careful in handling pole (1). Make sure it does
not get out of control.
Soldier A 1.
Operate rear winch (2) slowly to lower pole (1) into hole (3).
(Refer to para 4-15d.)
Soldier B 2.
Using tagline (4), guide lower end of pole (1) into hole (3). Take
off tagline.
Soldier A 3.
Stop winch (2) when pole (1) reaches bottom of hole (3). Do not
put any slack in winch cable (5).
GO TO FRAME 4
4-367
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
Soldier A 1.
Using pole pike, push and hold upper part of pole (1) in position.
Soldier B 2.
Using telegraph hand spoon, shovel 4 or 5 loads of dirt into hole (2)
and tamp with back fill tamp.
3.
Repeat step 2 until hole is filled.
Soldier A 4.
Take pole pike away from pole (1).
Soldier B 5.
Using telegraph hand spoon, pile the left over dirt around pole (1).
Soldier A 6.
Using digging and tamping bar, tamp dirt around pole (1).
7.
Soldier B 8.
9.
4-368
Operate rear winch (3) to put slack in winch cable (4). (Refer to
par 4-15d.)
Take winch cable (4) from pole (1).
Pull in and secure outriggers (5). (Refer to para 4- 15i.)
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Pulling Pole.
TOOLS:
Jack, rack bar with chain, 15 ton rated capacity
Spoon, hand, telegraph, 8 ft long, size 2
Bar, tamping and digging, 8 ft long
Tagline
PERSONNEL: Two
FRAME 1
CAUTION
Make sure wood pole (1) is strong enough to take pull without
breaking, before pulling pole. Use pole pulling jack (2) o r
dig hole alongside pole to loosen pole as required. Great
suction can be created under pole unless pole is loose in hole.
1.
Wrap jack chain (3) around pole (1).
2.
Operate jack handle (4) in an up and down motion to loosen pole (1).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-369
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Place truck so that derrick sheave (1) is almost touching pole (2).
Operate rear winch (3) to let out some slack in winch cable (4). (Refer to
para 4-15d.)
Tie winch cable (4) to pole (2) about 2 feet above the balance point.
Place outriggers (5) in position on ground. (Refer to para 4-15b.)
GO TO FRAME 3
4-370
FRAME 3
Soldier A 1.
Place tagline (1) on lower part of pole (2).
Soldier B 2.
Operate rear winch (3) and slowly lift pole (2) until it is clear of
hole (4). (Refer to para 4-15d.)
Guide lower part of pole (2) as needed with tagline (1).
Soldier A 3.
Soldier B 4.
Operate rear winch (3) to lower pole (2) to the ground. (Refer to
para 4-15d.)
Soldier A 5.
Block pole (2) to keep it from rolling.
6. Take tagline (1) and winch cable (5) from pole (2).
GO TO FRAME 4
4-371
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
If hole (1) will not be used:
(a)
Using telegraph hand spoon, fill hole (1) with dirt.
(b)
Using digging and tamping bar, tamp dirt down.
2.
Pull in and secure outriggers (2). (Refer to para 4-15i.)
3.
Lower derrick (3) to secured position. (Refer to para 4-15c.)
4.
Secure rear winch (4). (Refer to para 4-15d.)
4-372
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
m.
Operating Collapsible Cable Reel.
Depending on the amount of cable or wire on the reel,
one soldier, two soldiers, or the derrick tube and winch
might be required to handle it. If the derrick tube and
rear winch are needed, refer to lifting the 20- and 30inch augers, para 4-15f.
1.
Take out retaining pin (1) and take collapsible reel (2) from its stowed position.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-373
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Place collapsible reel (1) on rear winch shaft (2).
2.
Press reel (1) against spindle spring and turn it to the right until shaft dowel
pins (3) go into grooves (4) in the reel spindle shaft (5).
GO TO FRAME 3
4-374
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
WARNING
Make sure collapsible cable reel (1) is properly mounted on rear
winch shaft before operating reel. D O not overload cable reel.
Maximum pull on reel must not be more than 4, 000 pounds.
Stand clear of reel and cable during operation. Do not touch
cable unless absolutely necessary. Wear leather gloves to
avoid injury.
CAUTION
Make sure ends of cable are made fast before installing or
removing cable from reel. If the cable gets tangled it could
cause damage to equipment.
1.
Collapse cable reel (1) by turning operating handle (2) left until sliding spider (3)
separates from handle.
2.
Push in sliding spider (3) to completely collapse cable reel (1). Wire coil may now
be placed onto or taken off of rim segments (4).
3.
Pull sliding spider (3) forward and turn operating handle (2) right to mesh with
spider. Continue to turn handle as far as it will go.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-375
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Press clutch pedal (1) down.
3.
Place TRANSFER CASE gear shift lever (2) in neutral position.
4.
Turn locking bar (3) and move transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (4) to rear
to on position.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-376
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
CAUTION
Make sure that winch control lever (1) is locked in neutral
position by hingelock (2).
1.
Place power divider control lever (3) in REAR WINCH FWD position.
2.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (4) in a forward position (not above 3),
then let clutch pedal (5) come up slowly.
Press down on accelerator pedal (6) enough to keep engine from stalling.
3.
GO TO FRAME 6
4-377
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 6
1.
To stop reel action; press clutch pedal (1) down and let up on accelerator pedal (2).
2.
Place power divider control lever (3) in NEUTRAL position.
GO TO FRAME 7
4-378
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 7
1.
To secure from operations; move transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (1) forward
to off position.
2.
Turn locking bar (2) to lock position.
3.
Stop the engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
GO TO FRAME 8
4-379
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Turn operating handle (1) left until sliding spider (2) separates from handle.
2.
Push in sliding spider (2) to completely collapse reel (3).
3.
Take off coil of wire if there is one on reel (3).
GO TO FRAME 9
4-380
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 9
1.
Pull forward on sliding spider (1) and turn operating handle (2) right to mesh with
spider (1). Continue to turn handle as far as it will go.
GO TO FRAME 10
4-381
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 10
1.
Press reel (1) against spindle spring and turn reel to the right. Continue to turn
reel until dowl pins (2) on shaft (3) separate from grooves in spindle shaft (4).
2.
Put reel (1) back onto stowing shaft (5) and put back retaining pin (6).
4-382
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-16.
1.
OPERATION OF HOT WATER PERSONNEL HEATER KIT.
Start engine and let it warmup. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
CAUTION
In ice, snow, or 0°F weather do not damage glass by
making sudden changes in temperature. Let more
heated air flow to personnel compartment than to the
windshield.
2.
Pull DAMPER knob (1) out to let warm air flow to personnel compartment.
3.
Pull DEFROSTER knob (2) out to let warm air flow to windshield.
4.
Move DAMPER knob (1) and DEFROSTER knob (2) in or out to control amount of
warm air to windshield or personnel compartment.
5.
Set HEATER (blower motor) switch (3) in HI or LO position as needed.
6.
To stop heating or defrosting action, set HEATER (blower motor) switch (3) in OFF
position.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
7.
4-383
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-17. OPERATION OF ARCTIC WINTERIZATION KIT.
a. General. The arctic winterization kit is designed for use in areas where the
average temperature is -25 °F to -65 ºF.
NOTE
Installation of quilted cargo compartment cover and quilted
engine compartment cover is done at direct support
maintenance level.
b.
Operating the Winterfront Cover.
1.
During cold weather when engine cannot hold normal operating temperatures, attach
a winterfront cover (1) to radiator brushguard.
2.
Open aperture flap (2) when engine temperature goes above 180 °F.
CAUTION
If engine temperature continues to rise after opening
aperture flap (2), take off winterfront cover (1) completely so that engine does not overheat. Failure to
remove the winterfront cover may cause damage to
the engine.
3.
Close aperture flap (2) when engine operating temperature stays below 180 °F.
4.
Close aperture flap (2) during standby periods and overnight.
4-384
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Using the Quilted Engine Compartment Cover.
FRAME 1
CAUTION
Open aperture flap (1) when engine temperature goes
above 180 ºF. If engine temperature keeps going up, take
off quilted engine compartment cover (2) completely, so
that engine does not overheat. Failure to remove quilted
engine compartment cover may cause damage to the engine.
4-385
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Operating the Fuel Burning Personnel Heater.
FRAME 1
1. Open the fuel shutoff cock (1) by turning it to the left.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-386
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Make sure that personnel heater EMERGENCY switch (1) is in the up position.
2.
Pull DAMPER knob (2) to full out position.
3.
Place HI-LO switch (3) in HI or LO position, depending on heat needed.
4.
Hold START-OFF-RUN switch (4) in START position until indicator light (5) comes
on. STAR T-OFF-RUN switch (4) is spring loaded and must be held in position.
5.
As soon as the indicator light (5) comes on, move START-OFF-RUN switch (4)
quickly to RUN position.
NOTE
Moving START-OFF-RUN switch (4) lever from START
position to RUN position too slowly will result in a
heater shutdown. Move switch lever quickly. Warm
air should be felt at the heat outlet within three minutes.
If heater fails to start within two minutes (indicator
light (5) remains off), move START-OFF-RUN switch
(4) to OFF position. Wait three minutes before trying
to start heater again.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-387
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Pull DAMPER knob (1) out to get more heated air from the heat outlet.
2.
Push DAMPER control knob (1) into lower amount of hot air coming from the heat
outlet.
NOTE
Do not operate the heater with the DAMPER knob (1) pushed
all the way in. The unit does not work best with knob in this
position.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-388
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
2.
Pull DEFROSTER knob (1) out all the way for maximum defrosting. For even
heating and defrosting, push DEFROSTER knob half way in.
To stop the heater, set the HI-LO switch (2) in the LO position, and set the
START-OFF-RUN switch (3) to OFF position.
3.
The burner will stop in a few seconds but indicator light (4) will stay on.
4.
When burner is cool and all unused fuel is out, indicator light will go out.
NOTE
Wait until indicator light (4) goes out before trying to
restart heater.
GO TO FRAME 5
4-389
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
CAUTION
Under normal conditions do not stop heater by setting
personnel heater EMERGENCY switch (1) in off (down)
position. Damage to equipment may result.
In case of an
EMERGENCY
cause damage
sonnel will be
emergency condition, set personnel heater
switch (1) in. off (down) position. This may
to equipment but crew compartment perbetter protected.
1.
If heater fails to start or goes out after a short run, wait until indicator light (2)
goes out.
2.
Try to restart. If heater fails to operate after third try, notify direct support
maintenance unit.
4-390
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Operating the Fuel Burning Power Plant Heater.
FRAME 1
NOTE
The fuel burning power plant heater is designed to keep the
engine compartment warm when vehicle is not in use. This
heater should not be used while operating the vehicle.
1.
Make sure heater coolant outlet shutoff cock (1) is fully open (turn left).
2.
Make sure heater coolant inlet shutoff cock (2) is fully open (turn left).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-391
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Turn engine heater fuel shutoff cock (1) left to open position.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-392
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Set Hi-LO switch (1) to LO position.
2.
Hold START-OFF-RUN switch (2) in START position until indicator light (3) comes
on. Indicator light should come on within two minutes.
NOTE
START-OFF-RUN switch (2) is spring loaded and must be
held in position.
3.
As soon as indicator light (3) comes on, quickly move START-OFF-RUN switch (2)
to RUN position.
NOTE
Moving switch (2) lever from START to RUN too slowly will
result in a heater shutdown. Warm air should be felt at the
heat outlet within three minutes.
4.
If heater fails to start within two-minutes, (indicator light (3) remains off), move
STAR T-OFF-RUN switch (2) to OFF position. Wait until three minutes before
trying again to start.
5.
Set HI-LO switch (1) to HI or LO depending on heat needed.
NOTE
LO position of HI-LO switch (1) is suitable for standby
periods when heater will operate for a long period of time.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-393
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
To stop the engine heater, set the HI-LO switch (1) to LO position.
2.
Set START -OFF -RUN switch (2) to OFF position, burner will stop within a few
seconds.
3.
Indicator light (3) will remain on, blower will keep running until burner cools and
unburned gases are out.
NOTE
Always wait until indicator light (3) goes out before trying to
restart engine heater.
4.
4-394
If heater fails to start after three tries or stops after a short run, tell direct
support maintenance.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
f.
Using the Slave Receptacle.
FRAME 1
NOTE
A vehicle with discharged batteries can get power from another
vehicle through the slave receptacle.
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Place vehicle so that slave receptacle (1) faces slave receptacle of disabled vehicle.
3.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
4.
Turn left, unscrew protective cap (2) and swing it to the side.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-395
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Plug service cable connectors (1) into slave receptacle (2) on each vehicle.
2.
Start engine of slaving vehicle. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
3.
Set idle speed at 1,000-1100 rpm.
Start engine of disabled vehicle. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
4.
6.
As soon as engine is running smoothly, remove service cable connectors (1) from
receptacles (2).
Swing protective caps (3) back into position and screw cap onto receptacle.
7.
Stop engine on slaving vehicle. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
5.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-396
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Check battery generator indicator (1) on slaved vehicle. If indicator reading is in
the yellow or red, stop engine, refer to para 4-6e, and tell organizational
maintenance.
4-397
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-18. OPERATING THE DEEP WATER FORDING KIT.
TOOLS: Straight bar plug wrench
Ratchet wrench
FRAME 1
NOTE
Trucks with deep water fording kits can ford hard bottom
crossings up to 72 inches deep.
1.
2.
Using straight bar plug wrench and ratchet wrench, unscrew drain plug (1) from
storage boss (2) on flywheel housing.
Screw drain plug (1) into drain port (3).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-398
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Make fast all loose objects to the vehicle.
2.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
3.
On trucks with bracket-mounted FORDING control, move fording valve control
lever (1) left to IN. On trucks with panel-mounted fording control, pull FORDING
valve cable control handle (2) out.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-399
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all the way down.
2.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift levers (2) in position 1.
3.
Move TRANSFER CASE shifting lever (3) down to LOW position.
4.
Let clutch pedal (1) up.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-400
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
WARNING
Do not attempt to ford your truck in depths greater than
72 inches. While fording, keep your speed down to 3 to
4 miles per hour.
After fording, do not rely on brakes until they dry out.
Keep putting them on and releasing them until vehicle
stops without brakes grabbing.
Failure to observe these warnings could result in injury
to personnel and damage to equipment.
1.
Make sure your engine is running correctly and start fording.
2.
After leaving the water, on trucks with bracket-mounted FORDING control, move
FORDING valve control lever (1) to the right, OUT position. On trucks with
panel-mounted fording control, push FORDING valve cable control handle (2) in.
3.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
GO TO FRAME 5
4-401
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 5
1.
Using straight bar plug wrench and ratchet wrench, unscrew flywheel housing
drain plug (1) from drain port (2).
2.
Screw drain plug (1) into storage boss (3).
3.
Wash off all salt water and salt deposits from every part of truck.
4.
As soon after fording as possible, take truck to organizational maintenance for
lubrication and servicing. Be sure to tell organizational maintenance that truck
has been used in fording operations.
4-402
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-19. OPERATING THE ELECTRIC BRAKE KIT.
NOTE
The electric brake kit is installed on trucks used to move
trailers or semitrailers.
WARNING
Electric brakes on towed trucks operate when service
brake pedal is pressed down, not when rheostat control
handle (1) is turned. Make sure brakes work correctly
at the number you set on the rheostat. Failure to make
sure brakes work correctly may result in injury to
personnel and damage to equipment.
1.
Turn rheostat control handle (1) to setting shown on data plate (2).
NOTE
Exact setting needed for each load must be found by
experience. Heavier loads need higher number setting.
4-403
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
SECTION III. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
4-20. SCOPE. Extremes of temperature, humidity and terrain conditions require special
operating procedures. Instructions for operating under these unusual conditions are contained in this section.
a. Refer to FM 55-30 for instruction on driver selection, training and supervision.
b. Refer to FM 21-305 for special driving instructions for operation of wheeled trucks
under unusual conditions.
4-21. GENERAL. When operating under unusual conditions, pay particular attention to all
gages and indicators for signs of trouble.
4-22. OPERATION IN EXTREME COLD WEATHER.
a.
General.
Extreme cold weather will cause:
(1) Lubricants to thicken or get hard.
(2) Batteries to freeze and keep from supplying enough current for starting.
(3) Electrical insulation to crack and cause short circuits.
(4) Fuel not to vaporize and mix with air to form a combustible mixture, for starting,
that will burn.
b. Related Publications. Refer to the following for information relating to operation of
a truck in cold weather conditions.
FM 31-70 Basic Cold Weather Manual
FM 31-71 Northern Operations
FM 90-6 (HTF) Mountain Operations
FM 9-207 Operation and Maintenance of Army Materiel
in Extreme Cold Weather (0° F to -65° F)
WARNING
FM 9-207 contains general information which applies
to all Army materiel. This information must be
considered part of this manual.
Approved practices and precautions must be followed
for safe cold weather operation so that personnel will
not be injured or equipment damaged.
c. Winterization Kits. Special winterization equipment is provided in kit form when
protection against extreme cold (0° F to -650 F) is needed.
(1) Refer to para 4-16 for hot water personnel heater kit operating instructions.
(2) Refer to para 4-17 for artic winterization kit operating instructions.
4-404
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Moving the Truck.
CAUTION
After shutdown for long periods of time, lubricants harden
and brakes and tires may freeze fast. Take each condition
into account before moving truck so that equipment will not
be damaged.
NOTE
Check that PMCS that apply to operation in extreme cold
weather have been done.
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6 b), and let it warm up thoroughly.
2.
Step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all the way down.
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (2) in position 1.
4.
Place TRANSFER CASE gearshift lever (3) to LOW (DOWN) position.
5.
Let clutch pedal (1) up.
6.
Drive truck at lowest speed possible for about 100 yards. Be careful not to stall
engine. This should heat gears and tires for normal operation.
7.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
4-405
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Parking.
(1) Park truck in a sheltered area out of the wind, where possible. If no shelter is
available, park truck so that it does not face into the wind.
(2) Park truck on high dry ground, if possible. If high dry ground is not available,
spread out planks or brush and put wheel chocks in place, if necessary.
(3) Park truck on level ground so that body does not twist.
(4) Place all control lever in neutral position to stop freezing in gear due to water
condensation.
(5) In areas where temperatures reach -50°F or colder, put an extra 20 pounds of
air (above normal) in tires for long standby periods or overnight. (Refer to volume 2,
chapter 1, table 1-1.)
(6) Let the extra air out of tires before starting normal operations. Do not lower
pressure when tires are hot.
(7) Turn power plant heater on. (Refer to para 4-17e.)
(8) If truck does not have an arctic kit, tell organizational maintenance to take
batteries out. Store batteries in a warm place.
(9) The cooling system must be serviced and protected for temperatures below 32 °F.
Refer to TM 9-750-651 and TM 9-207 for special procedures.
(10) If no approved antifreeze solution is available, tell organizational maintenance
to drain radiator and block.
4-406
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
f.
Refueling.
FRAME 1
WARNING
Authorized procedures must be used to get rid of drained
fuel. Serious injury to personnel and damage to equipment
may result if correct procedure is not used.
NOTE
Before refueling, tell organizational maintenance to drain
fuel tank of any water.
1.
Refuel immediately after operations to reduce condensation that may form in fuel
tank.
2.
Drain water from primary (1), secondary (2), and final (3) fuel filters before fuel
system cools below freezing point (refer to TM 9-2320-209-10-2).
4-407
TM 9-2320 -209-10-1
4-23. OPERATION IN EXTREME HOT WEATHER.
WARNING
When engine temperature is above 180° F use extreme care
in taking off cooling system pressure cap so that you do not
get burned/scalded. Turn cap one-half turn to left to relieve
pressure before removing. Use a heavy rag or gloves to
protect hands.
a. General. Continuous operation of truck at high speeds, or under long hard pulls in
low gear ratios on steep grades or in soft terrain may cause engine to overheat. Try not to
use low gear ratios for long periods, when possible. Always watch for overheating. Stop
truck for a cooling-off period whenever necessary and tactical situation permits. If necessary, raise hood to help in cooling.
b. Cooling System. Scale and rust forms quicker in extremely high temperatures.
Always add corrosion-inhibiter compound to cooling liquid. Don’t use water that contains
minerals. Fill radiator with rain water whenever possible. Refer to TM 750-651 for
engine cleaning compound to be used.
(1) Check cooling system often, look for following:
(a) Proper coolant level in radiator (refer to TM 9-2320-209-10-2).
(b) Leaking hose connections
(c) Proper fan belt tension (refer to TM 9-2320-209-10-2).
(d) Cracked or leaking hose lines
(2) If truck is always overheating inspect and clean radiator fins with compressed air
to get rid of sand, dust, and inspect.
(3) If engine still overheats tell organizational maintenance.
c.
Batteries.
(1) In very hot zones, check level of electrolyte in battery cells daily. If they are
low, add distilled water. If distilled water is not available, use rain or drinking water. Use
of water with a high mineral content will damage batteries.
NOTE
The use of water with high mineral content will do less
damage to a battery than letting electrolyte level drop below
the plates. A battery left dry has a short life.
(2) A battery will discharge faster if left standing for long periods at high temperatures. If necessary to park for several days, tell organizational maintenance to take out
batteries and store them in a cool place.
d. Body and Chassis. In hot, damp climates, corrosion takes place quickly, especially
during rainy seasons. Check often for the following:
(1) Signs of pitting or paint blistering on metal surfaces.
(2) Signs of mildew, mold or fungus on fabrics, rubber and glass.
If you find signs of any of these, tell organizational maintenance.
4-408
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Parking the Truck.
(1) Do not park truck in the sun for long periods; heat and sunlight will shorten the
life of tires. When possible, park under cover to keep truck from sun, sand, and dust.
(2) Cover trucks not being used with paulins if no other suitable shelter is available.
When entire truck cannot be covered, cover window glass to stop etching of glass by sand,
and cover engine compartment to keep out sand.
(3) Check that tires are properly inflated. (Refer to table 2-5.)
NOTE
When checking tire pressure, do not let out air if tire is hot.
4-24. OPERATION ON UNUSUAL TERRAIN.
a.
Deep Snow or Mud.
(1) Choose a FRONT TRANSMISSION position low enough to keep engine speed above
recommended minimum speed (rpm) without making the wheels spin.
(2) Take care to keep spinning wheels from becoming buried up to the axle housing.
CAUTION
Do not lower tire pressure enough to damage equipment. Refill
tires to recommended pressure after emergency.
(3) If necessary, lower tire pressure.
(Refer to table 2-5.)
CAUTION
Do not drive with chains on only one wheel of a driving axle.
This may result in damage to the tire and/or power train.
(4) Tire chains should be used at all times when driving in deep snow, mud, or soft
sand.
WARNING
Do not jam sticks or stones under a spinning wheel. This can
cause injury to personnel or unnecessary tire wear.
(5) If one or more tires become stuck, use another truck to tow or winch the stuck
truck. If a truck is not available jack up stuck truck and put planking or matting under the
wheel.
(6) After operating truck on muddy or snowy surfaces, clean ice, snow or mud from
wheels, axles, radiator core, engine compartment steering knuckles and arms, air cleaner
intake, and electrical connections.
b. Hard Baked Sand. When driving on hard baked sand, try not to break through the
crust. A roadbed of canvas or planking should be set down for short distances.
c.
Ice.
(1) General. Skidding and loss of steering control are the main troubles found when
driving on icy roads. Due to lack of traction, the truck may continue in a straight direction
no matter which way you turn the wheels. When the wheels reach a point where you get
traction back the truck may veer sharply to left or right or stall.
4-409
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
(2) Skidding. When the rear end of the truck skids to either right or left, instantly
turn the front wheels in the same direction in which the rear end is skidding. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal but do not step down on the clutch pedal. Pump down on
brakes lightly.
d.
Dusty or Sandy Roads.
(1) When operating truck on dusty or sandy terrain, clean air filter daily. (Refer to
TM 9-2320-209-10-4.)
e.
Rocks and Boulders.
CAUTION
Too much pressure in tires will cause more shock through
the moving truck. Not enough pressure in tires can cause
internal breaking of the tires or damage to the tube.
(1) Refer to table 2-5 and inflate tires properly.
(2) Check tire pressure when tires are cold.
(3) Do not let out air when tires are hot.
f.
High Altitudes.
(1) High altitude operation requires careful maintenance of the cooling system. As
you go to a higher altitude, the boiling point of your coolant will become lower. The pressurized cooling system of your truck will operate at 220° F when taken care of in the right
way.
(2) Check all hose connections for leaks daily and be sure that radiator cap is closed
properly.
4-25. FORDING OPERATION.
a. General. Your truck can ford bodies of water up to a depth of 30 inches without the
use of special equipment. Special kits are available for deep water fording. (Refer to
para 4-18.)
4-410
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b. F o r d i n g .
TOOLS:
Straight bar plug wrench
Ratchet wrench
1.
Make sure that water is not deeper than 30 inches.
2.
Using a straight bar plug wrench and ratchet handle, unscrew flywheel housing drain
plug (1) from storage boss (2).
3.
Screw drain plug (1) into drain port (3).
GO TO FRAME 2
4-411
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Start engine, refer to para 4-6b, and make sure it is operating right.
WARNING
Limit speed to 3 to 4 miles per hour while fording. Do not try
to ford your truck at depths greater than 30 inches.
2.
Step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all the way down.
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gear shift lever (2) in position 1.
4.
Push TRANSFER CASE gearshift lever (3) to LOW DOWN position.
5.
Let clutch pedal (1) up.
6.
Enter water slowly.
WARNING
Do not rely on brakes until they dry out. After fording,
remove water from brake lining by pressing and letting go
of brake pedal. Keep stepping down and letting go of brake
pedal until truck stops without grabbing.
7.
Complete fording without stopping. Avoid too much use of clutch.
8.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
4-412
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
1.
Fording, Water Tank Trucks.
Before fording, open rear compartment doors and drain delivery lines, manifold
pipes and delivery pump.
(a) Push 400 gallon and 600 gallon compartment levers (1) forward to closed
position.
(b) Turn to left and take dust covers (2) off of delivery line discharge and suction
valves (3).
(c) Turn delivery line discharge and suction valve knobs (4) left all the way, to open
valves.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-413
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Start engine. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Press down on clutch pedal (1) and place TRANSFER CASE gearshift lever (2) in
neutral position.
3.
Turn locking bar (3) and pull transfer POWER TAKEOFF LEVER (4) back to on
position.
4.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (5) in position 2.
5.
6.
Let clutch pedal (1) up.
Pull hand THROTTLE (6) out to run engine at 1100 RPM for 60 seconds.
7.
Turn hand THROTTLE (6) and put it in.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-414
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Put dust covers (1) onto delivery line discharge and suction valve adapters (2), turn
right to tighten.
2.
Turn delivery line discharge and suction valve knobs (3) right all the way to
close valves.
3.
Close and lock rear compartment doors (4).
GO TO FRAME 4
4-415
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Turn exhaust bypass fording valve (1) right, all the way, to closed position.
2.
Before fording refer to para 4-25b, frames 1 and 2.
4-416
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
After Fording.
TOOLS:
Straight bar plug wrench
Ratchet wrench
FRAME 1
1.
Dry brakes out by stepping down and letting go of brake pedal until truck stops
without grabbing.
2.
Stop vehicle and shut down engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
3.
Using a straight bar plug wrench and ratchet handle, unscrew drain plug (1) from
flywheel housing drain port (2).
4.
Screw drain plug (1) into storage boss (3).
4-417
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e.
Care of Vehicle After Fording.
(1) Clean all surfaces that have been in the water.
with engine lubricating oil (OE).
Coat all unpainted metal parts
(2) When necessary return to organizational maintenance for paint touch up.
NOTE
Salt water fording causes rust, especially on unpainted surfaces.
Clean salt water and salt deposits from all parts of truck as
soon as possible. Deliver truck as soon as possible to direct
support maintenance regardless of maintenance done.
f. Accidental Submersion.
inches do the following:
If truck is accidently submerged in water deeper than 30
(1) Salvage truck.
(2) Preserve truck temporarily.
(3) As soon as possible, send truck to direct support maintenance for complete
maintenance.
4-418
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
4-26.
EMERGENCY PROCEDURES.
a.
Using Slave Receptacle to Start the Engine. (Refer to para 4-17f.)
b.
Using Jumper Cables to Start the Engine.
TOOLS: Jumper cables
1.
Position slave truck so that its batteries (1) are directly opposite batteries (2) of
disabled truck.
2.
Stop engine. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
GO TO FRAME 2
4-419
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
1.
Open battery compartment doors (1) of both trucks.
2.
Loosen thumbscrews (2).
3.
Move clamps (3) as far as they go to the right.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-420
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 3
1.
Pull battery boxes (1) of both trucks out far enought for battery posts to be reached.
CAUTION
Be sure to connect positive post of disabled truck to positive
post of slave truck, and negative post of disabled truck to
negative post of slave truck. This will prevent damage to
alternator and other equipment.
2.
Clamp one end of positive (red) jumper cable (2) to positive battery post (battery B)
of disabled truck. Clamp other end to positive battery post (battery B) of slave
truck.
3.
Clamp one end of negative (black) jumper cable (3) to negative battery post
(battery A) of disabled truck. Clamp other end of jumper cable (3) to negative
battery post (battery A) of slave truck.
GO TO FRAME 4
4-421
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 4
1.
Start engine of slave truck. (Refer to para 4-6b.)
2.
Start engine of disabled truck. (Refer to para 4-6e.)
NOTE
If engine of disabled truck does not start after three or four
tries, notify organizational maintenance.
CAUTION
Completely remove one jumper cable at a time to prevent
contact of positive (red) and negative (black) ends of cables.
Shorting of battery can cause serious damage to alternator.
3.
Remove jumper cables (1).
4.
Push battery boxes (2) back into place.
5.
Secure battery boxes (2) with clamps (3) and thumbscrews (4).
6.
Close battery compartment doors.
4-422
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
c.
Towing the Truck to Start Engine.
PERSONNEL:
TW O
FRAME 1
CAUTION
Do not try to tow a disabled truck with two chains wrapped
around center of bumper. This may cause damage to bumper.
Be sure that service brakes are operating properly before
towing.
NOTE
Approval from maintenance officer must be obtained before
towing your truck to start engine.
1.
Hook each end of tow chain (1) to lifting shackles (2) of truck to be towed.
Chain should be long enough for both trucks to be able to move around.
2.
Slip center of tow chain into pintle (3) of towing truck.
4-423
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
NOTE
Steps 1 through 9 are done on the towed (disabled) truck.
1.
Step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all the way down.
2.
Place TRANSFER CASE gearshift lever (2) in HIGH UP position.
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gear shift lever (3) in position 5.
4.
Let clutch pedal (1) up.
5.
Push ENG. STOP control (4) all the way in.
6.
Pull hand THROTTLE (5) out three-fourths of an inch.
7.
Turn ACCESSORY switch (6) to ON position.
8.
Step down on service brake pedal (7) to keep truck from coasting.
9.
Push handbrake (8) down to off position.
10. Step down on clutch pedal (1) all the way.
GO TO FRAME 3
4-424
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
NOTE
Steps 1 through 7 are done on the towed (disabled) truck.
1.
As soon as towing begins, let service brake pedal (1) up.
2.
Hold clutch pedal (2) in until truck speed reaches 10 miles per hour.
3.
Let clutch pedal (2) up slowly and operate accelerator pedal (3) as necessary.
NOTE
For cold weather starting, move MANIFOLD HEATER
switch (4) to ON position as soon as clutch pedal (2) is up.
4.
When engine starts, step down on clutch pedal (2).
5.
Put FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (5) to N position.
6.
Bring truck to a stop.
7.
Release clutch pedal (2).
NOTE
During cold weather turn MANIFOLD HEATER switch (4)
ON and OFF until engine is warm.
4-425
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
d.
Highway Towing (M44A2 Series Trucks).
TOOLS :
Tow Bar
Pliers
FRAME 1
CAUTION
Do not tow a truck that has become disabled because of a
damaged transfer, axle or transmission. Tell direct
support maintenance.
Do not try to tow with front or rear wheels off the ground.
Tell direct support maintenance.
Do not push a disabled truck. Use towing procedure only.
1.
Using pliers take cotter pins (1) from right and left shackle retainer pins (2)
on front bumper (3) of truck to be towed.
2.
Take off retainer pins (2) and lifting shackles (4).
3.
Install tow bar (5) on lifting shackle brackets (6) with retainer pins (2) and
cotter pins (1).
4.
Install tow bar (5) ring on pintle hook (7) of towing vehicle.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-426
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Step on clutch pedal (1) and press it all the way down.
2.
Place TRANSFER CASE gear shift lever (2) in neutral (mid) position.
3.
Place FRONT TRANSMISSION gearshift lever (3) to N position.
4.
Let clutch pedal (1) up.
5.
Set handbrake (4) free (down position).
6.
Tow truck following procedure given in para 4- 26c.
4-427
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
e. Highway Towing (M44A1 Series Trucks).
CAUTION
M44A1 series trucks are equipped with a sprag unit (overspinning clutch). In order to prevent damage to the drive
train, the following procedure must be followed closely.
1.
Mark one corner of mating flanges (1) of front axle drive shaft (2) at front axle
with paint.
2.
Mark one corner of mating flanges (3) of front axle drive shaft (2) at transfer case
with paint.
3.
Take out four bolts (4) from each end.
with truck.
GO TO FRAME 2
4-428
Store drive shaft and connecting hardware
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
FRAME 2
1.
Match mark on corner of mating flanges (1) of forward rear axle drive shaft (2)
and forward rear axle.
2.
Take out four bolts (3) and separate drive shaft (2) from axle.
3.
Tie down loose end of drive shaft (2) to frame crossmembers (4) so it will not
loosen during towing.
4.
Tow truck following procedure given in para 4-26c.
4-429/(4-430 blank)
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
APPENDIX A
REFERENCES
PUBLICATION INDEXES and GENERAL REFERENCE.
A-1.
Indexes should be checked often for the latest changes or revisions of references given
in this appendix and for new publications on materiel covered in this technical manual.
a.
Military Publications Indexes.
Index of Blank Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DA Pam 310-2
Military Publications:
Index of Technical Manuals, Technical
Bulletins, Supply Bulletins, and
Lubrication Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b.
A-2.
DA Pam 310-4
General Reference.
Authorization Abbreviations and Brevity
Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR 310-50
Dictionary of United Stated Army Terms . . . . . . . . . . . .
AR 310-25
FORMS.
The following forms are for this materiel (refer to DA Pamphlet 310-2 for index of
blank forms and to TM 38-750 for explanation of their use).
A-3.
Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms . .
DA Form 2028
Maintenance Request - Continuation Sheet . . . . . . . . . .
DA Form 2407-1
Equipment Log Assembly (Records) .. . ... . . . . . . .
DA Form 2408
OTHER PUBLICATIONS.
a.
Truck.
Lubrication Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Organizational Maintenance Manual
(Multifuel
Engine)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LO 9-2320-209-12/1
TM 9–2320–209–20–1
–2 , –3
A-1
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
b.
General.
Basic Cold Weather Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 31-70
Northern Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 31-71
Mountain Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 490-6
Security of Tactical Wheeled Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .TB 9-2300-422-20
Use of Antifreeze Solutions and Cleaning
Compounds in Engine Cooling Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB 750-651
Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel
in Cold Weather (0° to -65 °F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM 9–207
Deep Water Fording
TM 9-238
. ....... .. .... . . . . .. . . . .
Petroleum Tank Vehicle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 10–71
Driver Selection and Training (Wheeled
Vehicles) .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 55-30
Drivers Manual, Wheeled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 21–305
Army Maintenance Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TM 38-750
Route Reconnaissance and Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FM 5-36
A-2
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
APPENDIX B
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM LIST
Section I.
INTRODUCTION
B-1. SCOPE. This appendix lists integral components of and basic issue items for the
2 l/2-ton, 6 x 6, M44A1 and M44A2 series trucks (multifuel) to help you find items needed
for safe and efficient operation.
B-2. GENERAL. This Components of End Item List is broken down into the following
sections:
a.
Section II. Integral Components of the End Item. These items, when put on
the truck, are part of the truck and must go with it whenever it is moved to
another site or turned in. The illustrations will help you find these items.
b.
Section III. Basic Issue Items. These are the minimum basic items needed to
place the truck in operation, to operate it, and to do emergency repairs. Although
packed and shipped separately, they must go with the truck during operation and
whenever it is turned over to another accountable officer. The illustrations
will help you with hard-to–find items. This manual is your authority to order
replacement BII, based on TOE/MTOE authorization of the end item.
B-3. EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS.
a.
Illustration.
This column is broken down as follows:
(1) Figure Number.
(2) Item Number.
The number of the illustration on which the item is shown.
The number of the item called out in the illustration.
b.
National Stock Number. The National Stock Number given to the item which will
be used to order the item.
c.
Part Number. The primary number used by the manufacturer which controls the
design and characteristics of the item by means of its engineering drawings,
specifications, standards, and inspection requirements to pin point the item or
range of items.
d.
Description.
of the item.
Gives the Federal Item Name and, if needed, a minimum description
e.
Location. The location on the truck of each item listed is given in this column.
B-1
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
f.
Usable on Code. Usable On codes are given to help you find which component
items are used on the different models. The codes used in these lists are as
follows:
Code
B-2
Used On
A
All trucks
AA
All trucks w/winch
AB
Model M35A1
AC
Model M35A2
AD
Model M35A2C
AE
Model M36A2
AF
Model M49A1C
AG
Model M49A2C
AH
Model M50A1
AI
Model M50A2
AJ
Model M50A3
AK
Model M109A2
AL
Model M109A3
AM
Model M185A2
AN
Model M185A3
AO
Model M275A1
AP
Model M275A2
AR
Model M342A2
AS
Model M756A2
AT
Model M764
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
g.
Quantity Required (Reqd Qty). This column lists the quantity of each item needed
for a complete major item.
h. Quantity. This column is left blank and is to be used during an inventory. In the
Rev' d column, list the quantity you actually get on your major item. The Date
columns are for your use when you make an inventory of the major item at a later
date, such as for shipment to another site.
B-4. ABBREVLATIONS. The following abbreviations are found in the lists:
Abbreviation
Explanation
assy
assembly
compt
compartment
dbl
double
dia
diameter
ea
each
ft
foot, feet
gal
gallon(s)
hex
hexagon
in.
inch(es)
L
left
lb
pound(s)
lg
long
max
maximum
oz
ounce
R
right
rd
round
sq
square
thd
thread
w/
with
wo/
without
B-3
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section II.
B-4
Section II
Figure B-1.
Section II.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-5
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III.
B-6
Figure B-2.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-7
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III.
B-8
Figure B-2
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-9
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III.
B-10
Figure B-3.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-11
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III.
B-12
Figure B-4.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-13
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III.
B-14
Figure B-4.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-15
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III
B-16
Figure B-5.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-17
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III
B-18
Figure B-5.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-19
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III
B-20
Figure B-5.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-21
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III
B-22
Figure B--5.
section III
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-23
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III
B-24
Figure B-6.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-25
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III
B-26
Figure B-6.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-27
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III
B-28
Figure B-7.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-29
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III
B-30
Figure B-7.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-31
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III
B-32
Figure B-7.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-33
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section III
B-34
Figure B-8.
Section III.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
B-35/(B-36 blank)
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
APPENDIX C
ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
Section I.
INTRODUCTION
C-1. SCOPE. This appendix lists additional items you are authorized for the support of
the 2 1/2-ton, 6 x 6, M44A1 and M44A2 series trucks (multifuel).
C-2. GENERAL. This list is made up of items that do not have to stay with the truck and
that do not have to be turned in with it. Authorization for these items is given by CTA,
MTOE, TDA or JTA.
C-3. EXPLANATION OF LISTING. National stock numbers, descriptions, and quantities
give all details needed to order the additional items for support of this equipment. If item
needed is different for different models of this equipment, the model using this item is shown
under the Usable On Code heading in the Description column. These codes are as follows:
Code
Used On
A
All trucks
AA
All trucks w/winch
AB
Model M35A1
AC
Model M35A2
AD
Model M35A2C
AE
Model M36A2
AF
Model M49A1C
AG
Model M49A2C
AH
Model M50A1
AI
Model M50A2
AJ
Model M50A3
AK
Model M109A2
C-1
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Code
C-2
Used On
AL
Model M109A3
AM
Model M185A2
AN
Model M185A3
AO
Model M275A1
AP
Model M275A2
AR
Model M342A2
AS
Model M756A2
AT
Model M764
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST
(3)
(4)
U/M
QTY
AUTH
(2)
(1)
DESCRIPTION
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
PART NUMBER & FSCM
USABLE ON CODE
4930-00-288-1511
ADAPTER: Extension, grease gun
6300333 (19207)
AT
Ea
1
2540-00-670-2459
BAG, PAMPHLET:
7961712 (19207)
A
Ea
1
5150-00-772-4142
BAG: To017724142 (19207)
A
Ea
1
5120-00-240-6040
BAR: Crow, pinch piont, 48-in.
11677049 (19207)
AS
Ea
2
5120-00-237-8256
BAR: Digging and tamping GGG-B-lOl
AT
Ea
2
5120-00-242-3417
BAR: Tamping, backfill, 8-ft
GGG-T-0040
(80244)
AT
Ea
2
7530–ol–065_o166
FOLDER: Equipment Record
A
Ea
1
3940-00-111-6693
BLOCK RIGGING: Wire rope
11631700 (19207)
AA
Ea
1
7240-00-222-3088
CAN: Gas, military, 5-gallon
11677019 (19207)
A
Ea
1
5120-00-247-2834
CANT HOOK: 4-ft MIL-H-20638 (81349)
AT
Ea
2
4010-00-473-6166
CHAIN: Utility, single leg
7077063 (19207)
AA
Ea
1
9905-00-148-9546
WARNING DEVICE KIT: RR-W-1817
(81348)
AS,
AT
Ea
1
4930-00-253-2478
GREASE GUN: Hand, lever operated
5644803 (19207) MIL-G-3859 Size 1
(81349)
AT
Ea
1
5120-00-061-8543
HAMMER: Machinist, l-lb
11677028 (19207)
AA
Ea
1
5120-00-900-6103
HAMMER: Machinist, 3-lb
11677042 (19207)
AS
Ea
1
5120-00-900-6095
HAMMER: Machinist, 6-lb
11677050 (19207)
AS
Ea
1
For publications
C-3
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST - Cont
(3)
(4)
U/M
QTY
AUTH
(2)
(1)
DESCRIPTION
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
PART NUMBER & FSCM
USABLE ON CODE
5120–00–595–8381
JACK: Pole pulling assy
8329902 (19207)
AT
Ea
1
k930-00-266-9182
OILER: Hand, pushbutton
6008514 (19207)
GGG-O-591 (81348)
AT
Ea
1
j120-00-596-1112
PIKE, POLE: Wood, 12-ft
GGG-P-335 (80244)
AT
Ea
4
;315-00-839-2325
PIN, COTTER: MS 24665-132 (96906)
AS
Ea
6
;315-00-839-5820
PIN, COTTER: MS 24665-134 (96906)
AA,
AT
Ea
6
;315-00-064-2701
PIN, SHEAR: MS20392-3C37 (19207)
AS
Ea
3
;315-00-252-5669
PIN, SHEAR: 11609886 (19207)
AT
Ea
3
;315-00-736-8685
PIN, SHEAR: 7538740 (19207)
AA
Ea
3
;120-00-223-7397
PLIERS:
(81348)
A
Ea
1
i120-00-752-9031
PUNCH, DRIVE: 11677010
AA
Ea
1
i120-00-222-8852
SCREWDRIVER:
l/4-in.w,
GGG-S-121 (81348)
Ea
1
;120-00-240-8716
SCREWDRIVER: x-point, #1
GGG-S-121 (81348)
A
Ea
1
5120-00-234-8913
SCREWDRIVER: x-point, #2
GGG-S-121 (81348)
A
Ea
1
5120-00-188-8440
SHOVEL: Hand, telegraph, 8-ft
GGG-S-326 (81348)
AT
Ea
2
5120-00-188-8444
SPOON: Hand, telegraph, 8-ft
GGG-S-326 (81348)
AT
Ea
2
C-4
8-in., w/cutter GGG-P-471
(19207)
4-in.’blade
A
.
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section II. ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST - Cont
(3)
(4)
U/M
QTY
AUTH
(2)
(1)
DESCRIPTION
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
PART NUMBER & FSCM
USABLE ON CODE
7240-00-177-6154
SPOUT: Can, flexible nozzle
11677020 (19207)
A
Ea
1
5120-00-242-3417
TAMP: Back fill, 8-ft
GGG-T-0040 (80244)
AT
Ea
2
5120-00-240-5328
WRENCH: Adjustable, open end,
0. 947-in. jaw opening GGG-W-631
(81348)
A
Ea
1
5120-00-423-6728
WRENCH: Adjustable, open end,
1.698-in. jaw opening GGG-W-631
(81348)
AT
Ea
1
5315-00-732-1019
WRENCH, PLUG: l/2-in, sq drive,
2 l/2-in. lg
MS20066-543 (96906)
A
Ea
1
Ea
1
NOT E
The following tool bracket assembly
is issued on AS and AT trucks as
noted. At the commanders discretion
it is authorized for installation on all
other model trucks.
2540-00-409-8891
BRACKET ASSY : Tool
MS53053-1 (96906)
AS, AT
C-5/(C-6 blank)
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
APPENDIX D
EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST
Section I. INTRODUCTION
D-1. SCOPE. This appendix lists expendable supplies and materials you will need to
operate and maintain the 2 l/2-ton, 6 x 6, M44A1 and M44A2 series trucks (multifuel).
These items are authorized by CTA 50-970, Expendable Items (Except Medical, Class V,
Repair Parts, and Heraldic Items).
D-2. EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS.
a.
Column 1 - Item number. This number is given to the entry in the listing.
b.
Column 2- Level.
item.
This is the lowest level of maintenance that needs the listed
C - Operator/Crew
O - Organizational Maintenance
c.
Column 3 - National Stock Number. This is the National Stock Number given to
the item; use it to order the item.
d.
Column 4 - Description. Shows the Federal Item Name and, if needed, a
description to give more details about the item. The last line for each item shows
the part number, followed by the Federal Supply Code for Manufacturer (FSCM) in
brackets, if it applies.
e.
Column 5 - Unit of Measure (U/M). Shows the measure used in doing the actual
maintenance function. This measure is shown by an alphabetical abbreviation
(es, in. qt). If the unit of measure is different from the unit of issue, order the
lowest unit of issue that will give you what you need.
D-1
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section II. EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIAL LIST
(1)
ITEM
NUMBER
1
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
LEVEL
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
(JIM
0
ANTIFREEZE: Permanent,
ethylene glycol (-60” F) inhibited
(MIL-A-46153) l-gal container
Gal
ANTIFREEZE: Permanent,
ethylene glycol (-60’ F) inhibited
(MIL-A-46153) 5-gaJ container
Gal
ANTIFREEZE: Permanent,
ethylene glycol (- 60° F) inhibited
(MIL-A-46153) 55-gal drum
Gal
ANTIFREEZE: Permanent,
arctic grade (-90° F) (O-1-490)
(M.IL-C-11755) 55-gal drum
Gal
FLUID, HYDRAULIC: Nonpetroleum base, automotive, arctic
type (MIL-H-1391O) l-gal can
Gal
FLUID, HYDRAULIC: Nonpetroleum base, automotive (HB)
(VV-B-680) l-pt can
Pt
FLUID, HYDRAULIC: Nonpetroleum base, automotive (HB)
(VV-B-680) l-gal can
Gal
GREASE: GAA, automotive and
artillery (MIL-G-10924) 2 l/2-oz
tube
Oz
GREASE: GAA, automotive and
artillery (MIL-G-10924) 14-oz
cartridge
Oz
GREASE: GAA, automotive and
artillery (MI L-G- 10924) l-lb can
Lb
190-0904
9150-oo190-0905
GREASE: GAA, automotive and
artillery (MIL-G - 10924) 5-lb can
Lb
6850-00 -
181-7929
2
0
6850-00-
181-7933
3
0
6850-00-
181-7940
4
0
6850-00-
174-1806
5
c
9150-oo-
252-6375
6
c
9150-oo-
190-0932
7
c
9150-oo-
231-9071
8
c
9150-oo-
065-0029
9
c
9150-oo-
935-1017
10
11
D-2
c
c
9150-oo-
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section II. EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIAL LIST - Cont
(1)
ITEM
NUMBER
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
LEVEL
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
U/M
12
c
13
c
14
0
15
c
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
9150-oo190-0907
GREASE: GAA, automotive and
artillery (MIL-G- 10924) 35-lb pail
Lb
Lb
9150-oo-
GREASE: GAA, automotive and
530-7369
artillery (MIL-G-10924) 120-lb
drum
6850-00 753-4967
INHIBITOR: Corrosion, liquid,
cooling system, powder form,
6-OZ can
Oz
Gal
9150-oo-
OIL, FUEL: Diesel, DF-1,
286-5286
winter (VV-F-800) bulk
9150-oo-
OIL, FUEL: Diesel, DF-1,
winter (VV-F-800) 5-gal drum
Gal
286-5287
Gal
9150-oo-
OIL, FUEL: Diesel, DF-1,
286-5288
winter (VV-F-800) 55-gal drum,
16 gage
9150-oo-
OIL, FUEL: Diesel, DF-1,
286-5289
winter (VV-F-800) 55-gal drum,
18 gage
9150-oo286-5294
OIL, FUEL: ~iesel, DF-2,
Gal
Gal
regular (VV-F-800) bulk
9150-oo-
OIL, FUEL: Diesel, DF-2,
286-5295
regular (VV-F-800) 5-gal can
9150-oo-
OIL, FUEL: Dieselj DF-2,
286-5296
regular (VV-F-800) 55-gal drum,
16 gage
Gal
Gal
Gal
9150-oo-
OIL, FUEL: Diesel, DF-2,
286-5297
regular (VV-F-800) 55-gal drum,
18 gage
9150-oo-
OIL, FUEL: Diesel, DF-A
(arctic) A, bulk
Gal
286-5283
9150-oo286-5282
OIL, FUEL: Diesel, DF-A
(arctic) A, 5-gal drum
Gal
D-3
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section II.
(1)
ITEM
NUMBER
D-4
EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIAL LIST - Cont
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
LEVEL
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
U/M
25
c
9150-oo286-5284
OIL, FUEL: Diesel, DF-A
(arctic) A, 55-gal drum, 16 gage
Gal
26
c
9150-oo286-5285
OIL, FUEL: Diesel, DF-A
(arctic) A, 55-gal drum, 18 gage
Gal
27
0
9150-oo234-5197
OIL, LUBRICATING: Exposed
gear, CW, (VV-L-751) 5-lb can
Lb
28
0
9150-oo261-7891
OIL, LUBRICATING: Exposed
gear, CW (VV-L-751) 35-lb pail
Lb
29
0
9150-o1035-5392
OIL, LUBRICATING: Gear, GO
80/90 (MIL-L-2105) l-qt can
Qt
30
0
9150-o1035-5393
OIL, LUBRICATING: Gear, GO
80/90 (MIL-L-2105) 5-gal drum
Gal
31
0
9150-o1035-5394
OIL, LUBRICATING: Gear, GO
80/90 (MIL-L-2105) 55-gal drum,
18 gage
Gal
32
0
9150-o1035-5390
OIL, LUBRICATING: Gear, GO
75 (MIL-L-2105) l-qt
Qt
33
0
9150-o1035-5391
OIL, LUBRICATING: Gear, GO
75 (M1L-L-2105) 5-gal drum
Gal
34
0
9150-oo402-4478
OIL, LUBRICATING: OEA
(MIL-L-46167) A, l-qt
Qt
35
0
9150-oo402-2372
OIL, LUBRICATING: OEA
(MIL-L-46167) A, Pail
Gal
36
0
9150-oo491-7197
OIL, LUBRICATING: OEA
(MIL-L-46167) A, 55-gal drum
Gal
37
c
9150-oo183-7807
OIL, LUBRICATING: OE/HDO
10 (MIL-L-2104) bulk
Gal
38
c
9150-oo189-6727
OIL, LUBRICATING: OE/HDO 10
(MIL-L-2104) l-qt Can
Qt
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
Section II. EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIAL LIST - Cont
(1)
39
II
I
40
41
42
I
(3)
(4)
(5)
NATIONAL
STOCK
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
U/M
9150-oo191-2772
OIL, LUBRICATING: OE/HDO 10
(MIL-L-2104) 55-gal drum, 18gage
Gal
c
9150-oo183-7808
OIL, LUBRICATING: OE/HDO 30
(MIL-L-2104) A, bulk
Gal
c
9150-oo186-6681
OIL, LUBRICATING : OE/HDO 30
(MIL-L-2104) A l-qt can
Qt
c
9150-oo189-6729
OIL, LUBRICATING: OE/HDO 30
(MIL-L-2104) A, 55-gal drum,
18 gage
Gal
(2)
c
D-5/(D-6 blank)
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
INDEX
Paragraph
Subject
Page
A
Additional authorization list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arctic winterization kit controls and indicators . . . . . . . .
Arctic winterization kit, operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-13
4- 4b
4-17
2-21
4-24
4-384
4-6a
3-2
3-2d
3-2b
3-2a
3-2c
4-30
3-1
3-2
3-1
3-1
3-2
2-8
4-8
4-8e
4-8f
4-8g
4-8a
4-8d
4-8c
4-8b
1-8
4-6c
4-2
4-3
4-17c
2-21
4-77
4-88
4-93
4-95
4-77
4-83
4-80
4-77
1-6
4-41
4-2
4-11
4-385
4-4c
4-18
2-1
2-2
2-2o
2-2n
2-2m
4-27
4-398
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-2
B
Before engine startup . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-in operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After the road test. . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Road test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
C
Capacities data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .
Dropsides, dropside cargo trucks, lowering . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dropsides and tailgate, removing . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .
Dropsides, tailgate, side and front racks, installing . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Racks, front and side, dropside cargo trucks, removing . . . .
Racks, front and side, installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Racks, front and side, removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Classification, vehicle/bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold weather starting below +20F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls and indicators, chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls and indicators, equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cover, quilted engine compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D
Deep water fording kit controls and indicators . . . . . . .
Deep water fording kit, operating the . . . . . . . . . . .
Description, functional, general . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description, functional, overall . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary equipment and accessories . . . . . . . . . .
Axles, wheels, and hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Index 1
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
INDEX-CONT
Subject
Paragraph
Page
. 2-2b
. 2-2e
. 2-2c
. 2-2a
. 2-2f
. 2-2d
. 2-2k
. 2-2d
. 2-2j
. 2-2h
. 2-2i
. 2-2g
. 2-3
. 2-4
. 2-4n
. 2-4m
. 2-4b
. 2-4e
. 2-4c
. 2-4a
. 2-4f
. 2-4d
. 2-4k
. 2-4l
. 2-4i
. 2-4j
. 2-4g
. 2-4h
. 1-6
. 2-7
. 4-2c
. 4-3e
. 4-13
. 4-13a
. 4-13c
. 4-13b
. 4-13d
. 4-13e
. 4-13f
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-20
2-19
2-5
2-8
2-6
2-2
2-9
2-7
2-15
2-18
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
1-1
2-21
4-5
4-18
4-235
4-235
4-238
4-236
4-244
4-247
4-252
D - cont
Description, functional, overall - cont
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propeller shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer power takeoff system . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission power takeoff system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description, physical, general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description, physical, overall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axles, wheels, and hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel and air intake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Propeller and drive shaft systems . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer power takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission power takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Destruction to prevent enemy use . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver’s compartment controls and indicators . . . . . . . .
Dump truck controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dump trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .
Tailgate, rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading, body down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading by dumping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading by spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index 2
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
INDEX-CONT
Paragraph
Subject
Page
E
Earth boring machine and polesetter truck controls and
indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Earth boring machines and polesetter trucks . . . . . . . .
Augers, 12-inch, and 16-inch, installing . . . .
Augers, and 30-inch, installing . . . . . . . .
Boring in various soils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collapsible cable reel, operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Derrick tube, raising, leveling, and lowering . . . . . .
Earth boring machine, operating . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Poles, dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Poles, pulling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Poles, setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing boring machine for travel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing truck for boring operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear winch, operating and securing . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric brake kit controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric brake kit, operating the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Highway towing, M44A2 series trucks . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing truck to start engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using jumper cables to start the engine . . . . . . . . . .
Using slave receptacle to start the engine . . . . . . . .
End item list, components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment improvement report and maintenance digest (EIR MD)
and equipment improvement report and maintenance
summary (EIR MS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extremely cold weather, operation in . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moving the truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winterization kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extremely hot weather, operation in . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Body and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking the truck.... . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3g
4-15
4-15e
4-15f
4-15h
4-15m
4-15c
4-15g
4-15a
4-15j
4-15l
4-15k
4-15i
4-15b
4-15d
4-4d
4-19
4-26
4-26d
4-26c
4-26b
4-26a
2-12
2-10
4-20
4-311
4-329
4-331
4-347
4-373
4-315
4-337
4-311
4-362
4-369
4-365
4-352
4-311
4-322
4-28
4-403
4-419
4-426
4-423
4-419
4-419
2-21
2-21
1-2
4-22
4-22a
4-22d
4-22e
4-22f
4-22b
4-22c
4-23
4-23c
4-23d
4-23b
4-23a
4-23e
1-1
4-404
4-404
4-405
4-406
4-407
4-404
4-404
4-408
4-408
4-408
4-408
4-408
4-409
Index 3
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
INDEX-CONT
Subject
Paragraph
Page
F
Fording operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accidental submersion . . . . . . . . . . . .
After fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of vehicle after fording . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .
Fording, water tank trucks . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forms and records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front winch controls and indicators . . . . . . . .
Fuel burning personnel heater . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel burning power plant heater . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking condition of filter. . . . . . . . . . . .
Fording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gravity discharging the tank sections . . . . . . .
Gravity filling the tank sections . . . . . . . . . .
Power discharging the tank sections . . . . . . . .
Suction filling the tank sections or transferring fuel
through pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank, trucks M49A1C and M49A2C, controls and
indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-25
4-25f
4-25d
4-25e
4-25b
4-25c
4-25a
1-2
4-2d
4-17d
4-17e
4-9
4-9e
4-9g
4-9a
4-9f
4-9b
4-9d
4-410
4-418
4-417
4-418
4-411
4-413
4-410
1-1
4-9
4-386
4-391
4-98
4-139
4-151
4-98
4-143
4-98
4-131
.
4-9c
4-110
.
.
4-3a
2-11
4-11
2-21
Hot water personnel heater kit controls and indicators . . . .
Hot water personnel heater kit, operation . . . . . . . . .
4-4a
4-16
4-23
4-383
4-2a
1-1
4-2
1-1
1-7
1-5
1-6
1-1
H
I
Instrument panel controls and indicators . . . . . . . . .
Introduction, scope... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M
Manual organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metric system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index 4
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
INDEX-CONT
Paragraph
Subject
Page
P
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipeline construction truck
A-frame, lowering, and preparing truck for travel
after rear operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-frame, lowering, and preparing truck for travel
after side operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-frame, rigging for rear operation . . . . . . .
A-frame, rigging for side operation . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear winch, operating . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pipeline construction truck controls and indicators . . .
Placing and keeping the truck in motion . . . . . . .
. .
4-14
4-257
. .
4-14d
4-278
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-14f
4-14c
4-14e
4-14a
4-14b
4-3f
4-6d
4-302
4-271
4-291
4-257
4-257
4-19
4-43
1-4
1-1
.
3-1
3-1
.
.
.
.
4-3c
4-11
4-11d
4-11c
4-15
4-202
4-212
4-210
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-11a
4-11b
4-11e
4-17f
4-4
4-6b
4-6e
2-14
4-202
4-209
4-216
4-395
4-23
4-37
4-55
2-21
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
R
Reporting improvement recommendations . . . . . . . . .
S
Service upon receipt of equipment, general . . . . . . .
Shop van and instrument repair shop trucks controls and
indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shop van and instrument repair van trucks . . . . . . .
Dome and blackout dome lights . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust blower, operating . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing shop van and instrument repair shop van
for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplying 115-volt ac power to shop van . . . . . .
Supplying power to moulding receptacles . . . . . .
Slave receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special kits controlsand indicators . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine above +20°F . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping the truck and engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplies and materials list, expendable . . . . . . . . .
Index 5
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
INDEX-CONT
Paragraph
Subject
Page
T
2-5
2-9
4-2e
4-12
4-12a
4-12b
4-12c
4-3d
2-21
2-21
4-10
4-217
4-217
4-217
4-231
4-17
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-24
4-24a
4-24d
4-24b
4-24f
4-24c
4-24e
4-409
4-409
4-410
4-409
4-410
4-409
4-410
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4-10
4-10a
4-10f
4-10b
4-10d
4-10g
4-10e
4-10c
4-3b
2-6
4-7
4-7b
4-7a
4-7d
4-7h
4-7f
4-7e
4-7c
4-7g
4-2b
4-17b
4-156
4-156
4-192
4-157
4-175
4-195
4-186
4-161
4-13
2-21
4-58
4-58
4-58
4-65
4-75
4-70
4-69
4-59
4-72
4-4
4-384
Tabulated data, general . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire inflation data . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer brake controls and indicators . . . . . . . .
Tractor trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .
Semitrailer, coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Semitrailer, uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tractor trucks controls and indicators . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
U
Unusual terrain, operation on . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deep snow or mud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dusty or sandy roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard baked sand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High altitudes.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ice . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rocks and boulders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
W
Water tank trucks, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gravity discharging the tank sections . . . . . .
Gravity filling the tank sections . . . . . . . .
Hydrant filling the tank sections . . . . . . . . . .
Operating during freezing temperatures . . . . .
Power discharging the tank sections . . . . . . .
Suction filling the tank sections or transferring water . .
Water tank trucks controls and indicators . . . .
Weight data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winch, front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before operating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lifting or pulling . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locking for travel . . . . . . . . . . .
Lowering load or unwinding slack cable . . . . . . .
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winch line, unwinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winch line, winding on drum . . . . . . . . .
Windshield controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . .
Winterfront cover, operating . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index 6
TM 9-2320-209-10-1
By Order of the Secretaries of the Army and the Air Force:
E. C. MEYER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
J. C. PENNINGTON
Major General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
LEW ALLEN, JR., G e n e r a l , U S A F
Official:
Chief of Staff
VAN L. CRAWFORD, JR., Colonel, USAF
Director of Administration
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-38,
Operator Maintenance requirements for 2-1/2 Ton Truck
Cargo, and 2-1/2 Ton Truck Van.
✰ U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1980-650-087/168